biblatex-oxref (18nov17)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@45847 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

12 files changed, 8612 insertions, 129 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
index 6138efad483..4c468d7f97a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
@@ -2,6 +2,8 @@ NAME  = oxref
 PFX   = biblatex-
 STY1  = oxnotes
 STY2  = oxyear
+STY3  = oxnum
+STY4  = oxalph
 SHELL = bash
 PWD   = $(shell pwd)
 TEMP := $(shell mktemp -d -t tmp.XXXXXXXXXX)
@@ -12,46 +14,47 @@ UTREE = $(shell kpsewhich --var-value TEXMFHOME)
 
 .PHONY: source clean distclean inst uninst install uninstall zip ctan
 
-all:	$(NAME).pdf $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf clean
+all:	$(NAME).pdf $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf $(STY3)-doc.pdf $(STY4)-doc.pdf
 	@exit 0
 
-source: $(NAME).dtx
+source $(NAME).bbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx $(STY1)-doc.tex $(STY1).bbx $(STY1).cbx $(STY1).dbx $(STY2)-doc.tex $(STY2).bbx $(STY2).cbx $(STY2).dbx $(STY3)-doc.tex $(STY3).bbx $(STY3).cbx $(STY3).dbx $(STY4)-doc.tex $(STY4).bbx $(STY4).cbx $(STY4).dbx: $(NAME).dtx
 	luatex -interaction=nonstopmode $(NAME).dtx >/dev/null
 
-$(NAME).bbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx $(STY1)-doc.tex $(STY1).bbx $(STY1).cbx $(STY1).dbx $(STY2)-doc.tex $(STY2).bbx $(STY2).cbx $(STY1).dbx: source
-
 $(NAME).pdf: $(NAME).dtx $(NAME).bbx $(STY1).bbx $(STY1).cbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx
 	latexmk -silent -lualatex -shell-escape -interaction=nonstopmode $(NAME).dtx >/dev/null
 $(STY1)-doc.pdf: $(STY1)-doc.tex $(NAME).bbx $(STY1).bbx $(STY1).cbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx
 	latexmk -silent -lualatex -shell-escape -interaction=nonstopmode $(STY1)-doc.tex >/dev/null
 $(STY2)-doc.pdf: $(STY2)-doc.tex $(NAME).bbx $(STY2).bbx $(STY2).cbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx
 	latexmk -silent -lualatex -shell-escape -interaction=nonstopmode $(STY2)-doc.tex >/dev/null
+$(STY3)-doc.pdf: $(STY3)-doc.tex $(NAME).bbx $(STY3).bbx $(STY3).cbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx
+	latexmk -silent -lualatex -shell-escape -interaction=nonstopmode $(STY3)-doc.tex >/dev/null
+$(STY4)-doc.pdf: $(STY4)-doc.tex $(NAME).bbx $(STY4).bbx $(STY4).cbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx
+	latexmk -silent -lualatex -shell-escape -interaction=nonstopmode $(STY4)-doc.tex >/dev/null
 
 clean:
-	rm -f {$(NAME),$(STY1)-doc,$(STY2)-doc}.{aux,bbl,bcf,blg,doc,fdb_latexmk,fls,glo,gls,hd,idx,ilg,ind,listing,log,nav,out,run.xml,snm,synctex.gz,toc,vrb}
-	rm -f {$(STY1),$(STY2),american-$(NAME),british-$(NAME),english-$(NAME)}.doc
+	rm -f {$(NAME),$(STY1)-doc,$(STY2)-doc,$(STY3)-doc,$(STY4)-doc}.{aux,bbl,bcf,blg,doc,fdb_latexmk,fls,glo,gls,hd,idx,ilg,ind,listing,log,nav,out,run.xml,snm,synctex.gz,toc,vrb}
+	rm -f {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4),american-$(NAME),british-$(NAME),english-$(NAME)}.doc
 	rm -rf _minted-*
 	rm -f $(NAME).markdown.in
 	rm -rf _markdown_*
 distclean: clean
-	rm -f $(NAME).{bbx,bib,ins,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx $(STY1)-doc.{tex,pdf} $(STY2)-doc.{tex,pdf}
+	rm -f $(NAME).{bbx,bib,ins,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}-doc.{tex,pdf}
 
 inst: all
 	mkdir -p $(UTREE)/{tex,source,doc}/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
 	cp $(NAME).{dtx,ins} $(UTREE)/source/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
-	cp $(NAME).bbx {$(STY1),$(STY2)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx $(UTREE)/tex/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
-	cp $(NAME).{bib,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2)}-doc.{tex,pdf} $(UTREE)/doc/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
+	cp $(NAME).bbx {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx $(UTREE)/tex/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
+	cp $(NAME).{bib,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}-doc.{tex,pdf} $(UTREE)/doc/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
 	mktexlsr
 uninst:
 	rm -r $(UTREE)/{tex,source,doc}/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
 	mktexlsr
 
-
 install: all
 	sudo mkdir -p $(LOCAL)/{tex,source,doc}/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
 	sudo $(NAME).{dtx,ins} $(LOCAL)/source/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
-	sudo $(NAME).bbx {$(STY1),$(STY2)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx $(LOCAL)/tex/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
-	sudo cp $(NAME).{bib,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2)}-doc.{tex,pdf} $(LOCAL)/doc/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
+	sudo $(NAME).bbx {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx $(LOCAL)/tex/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
+	sudo cp $(NAME).{bib,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}-doc.{tex,pdf} $(LOCAL)/doc/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
 	mktexlsr
 uninstall:
 	sudo rm -r $(LOCAL)/{tex,source,doc}/latex/$(PFX)$(NAME)
@@ -59,9 +62,9 @@ uninstall:
 
 zip: all
 	mkdir $(TDIR)
-	cp $(NAME).{dtx,pdf} $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf README.md Makefile $(NAME).bbx {$(STY1),$(STY2)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx $(TDIR)
+	cp $(NAME).{dtx,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}-doc.pdf README.md Makefile $(NAME).bbx {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}.{b,c,d}bx {american,british,english}-$(NAME).lbx $(TDIR)
 	cd $(TEMP); zip -Drq $(PWD)/$(PFX)$(NAME)-$(VERS).zip $(NAME)
 ctan: all
 	mkdir $(TDIR)
-	cp $(NAME).{dtx,pdf} $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf README.md Makefile $(TDIR)
+	cp $(NAME).{dtx,pdf} {$(STY1),$(STY2),$(STY3),$(STY4)}-doc.pdf README.md Makefile $(TDIR)
 	cd $(TEMP); zip -Drq $(PWD)/$(PFX)$(NAME)-$(VERS).zip $(NAME)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/README.md
index a33b1d690b7..9f6cfb8d13b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/README.md
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/README.md
@@ -1,15 +1,19 @@
 # biblatex-oxref: Biblatex styles inspired by the *Oxford Guide to Style*
 
-This bundle provides two [biblatex] styles that implement (some of) the
+This bundle provides four [biblatex] styles that implement (some of) the
 stipulations and examples provided by the 2014 *New Hart's Rules* and the 2002
 *Oxford Guide to Style*:
 
   * `oxnotes` is a style similar to the standard `verbose`,
     intended for use with footnotes;
+  * `oxnum` is a style similar to the standard `numeric`,
+    intended for use with numeric in-text citations.
+  * `oxalph` is a style similar to the standard `alphabetic`,
+    intended for use with alphabetic in-text citations.
   * `oxyear` is a style similar to the standard `authoryear`,
     intended for use with parenthetical in-text citations.
 
-Both styles should be considered experimental. In particular, the ways in which
+These styles should be considered experimental. In particular, the ways in which
 the styles handle certain tricky references are subject to change.
 
 [biblatex]: http://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex
@@ -22,6 +26,15 @@ To compile the documentation you will need to have the [minted] package working,
 which in turn relies on Python 2.6+ and Pygments. See the documentation of that
 package for details.
 
+### Managed way
+
+The latest stable release of the biblatex-oxref bundle has been packaged for
+TeX Live and MiKTeX. If you are running TeX Live and have `tlmgr` installed, you
+can install the bundle simply by running `tlmgr install biblatex-oxref`. If you
+are running MiKTeX, you can install the bundle by running
+`mpm --install=biblatex-oxref`. Both `tlmgr` and `mpm` have GUI versions that
+you might find friendlier.
+
 ### Automated way
 
 A makefile is provided which you can use with the Make utility on
@@ -29,16 +42,16 @@ UNIX-like systems:
 
   * Running `make source` generates the derived files
       - README.md
-      - oxref.bbx, oxnotes.bbx, oxyear.bbx
-      - oxnotes.cbx, oxyear.cbx
+      - oxref.bbx, oxnotes.bbx, oxyear.bbx, oxnum.bbx, oxalph.bbx
+      - oxnotes.cbx, oxyear.cbx, oxnum.cbx, oxalph.cbx
       - american-oxref.lbx, british-oxref.lbx, english-oxref.lbx
-      - oxnotes.dbx, oxyear.dbx
+      - oxnotes.dbx, oxyear.dbx, oxnum.dbx, oxalph.dbx
       - oxref.bib
       - oxref.ins
-      - oxnotes-doc.tex, oxyear-doc.tex
+      - oxnotes-doc.tex, oxyear-doc.tex, oxnum-doc.tex, oxalph-doc.tex
 
   * Running `make` generates the above files and also oxref.pdf,
-    oxnotes-doc.pdf, and oxyear-doc.pdf.
+    oxnotes-doc.pdf, oxyear-doc.pdf, oxnum-doc.pdf and oxalph-doc.pdf.
 
   * Running `make inst` installs the files in the user's TeX tree.
     You can undo this with `make uninst`.
@@ -60,9 +73,9 @@ first two steps.
  1. Run `luatex oxref.dtx` to generate the source files. (You can safely skip
     this step if you are confident about step 2.)
 
- 2. Compile oxref.dtx, oxnotes-doc.tex and oxyear-doc.tex with LuaLaTeX and
-    Biber to generate the documentation. You will need to enable shell escape
-    so that [minted] can typeset the listings.
+ 2. Compile oxref.dtx, oxnotes-doc.tex, oxyear-doc.tex, and oxnum-doc.tex with
+    LuaLaTeX and Biber to generate the documentation. You will need to enable
+    shell escape so that [minted] can typeset the listings.
 
  3. Move the files to your TeX tree as follows:
       - `source/latex/biblatex-oxref`:
@@ -72,17 +85,27 @@ first two steps.
         american-oxref.lbx,
         british-oxref.lbx,
         english-oxref.lbx,
+        oxalph.bbx,
+        oxalph.cbx,
+        oxalph.dbx,
         oxnotes.bbx,
         oxnotes.cbx,
         oxnotes.dbx,
+        oxnum.bbx,
+        oxnum.cbx,
+        oxnum.dbx,
         oxref.bbx,
         oxyear.bbx,
         oxyear.cbx,
         oxyear.dbx
       - `doc/latex/biblatex-oxref`:
         README.md,
+        oxalph-doc.pdf,
+        oxalph-doc.tex,
         oxnotes-doc.pdf,
         oxnotes-doc.tex,
+        oxnum-doc.pdf,
+        oxnum-doc.tex,
         oxref.bib,
         oxref.pdf,
         oxyear-doc.pdf,
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d856cd71926
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b845eb2ae7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,4222 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `oxalph-doc.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% oxref.dtx  (with options: `doc,a')
+%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
+%% biblatex-oxref --- Biblatex styles inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style
+%% Author:  Alex Ball
+%% E-mail:  a.j.ball@bath.ac.uk
+%% License: Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
+%% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+\def\Version{2017/11/18 v0.11}
+\ProvidesFile{oxalph-doc.tex}
+    [\Version\space Alphabetic biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
+\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxalph,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
+\documentclass[extrafontsizes,11pt,a4paper,oneside]{memoir}
+\setlrmarginsandblock{3cm}{3cm}{*}
+\setulmarginsandblock{2.5cm}{2.5cm}{*}
+\checkandfixthelayout
+\chapterstyle{ell}
+\renewcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
+  \vspace*{\prechapterprecisshift}%
+  \begin{flushright}\precisfont
+}
+\renewcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{flushright}}
+\hangsecnum
+\setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}
+\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\scshape\raggedright}
+\setsecnumdepth{subsection}
+\nouppercaseheads
+\makeoddhead{myheadings}{\textsc{\leftmark}}{}{\thepage}
+\makepsmarks{myheadings}{%
+  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}}%
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}%
+}
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\aliaspagestyle{title}{empty}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\nonzeroparskip
+\firmlists
+
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[mono=false,defaultfeatures={SmallCapsFeatures={Letters=SmallCaps,Renderer=Basic,Ligatures=NoCommon}}]{libertine}
+\usepackage{fontawesome}[2015/07/07]
+\newcommand{\booksym}{\makebox[1em][c]{\faicon{book}}}
+\newcommand{\cogsym}{\makebox[1em][c]{\faicon{cog}}}
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{fontspec}{%
+  \setmonofont[Scale=MatchLowercase,StylisticSet=1,AutoFakeSlant]{Inconsolatazi4}
+}{%
+  \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+  \usepackage[varl]{zi4}
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\usepackage{xcolor,xparse}
+\definecolor{Green}{rgb}{0,.5,0}
+\colorlet{ok}{Green}
+\colorlet{todo}{red}
+\colorlet{hacked}{orange}
+\colorlet{manual}{purple}
+
+\usepackage{tcolorbox}
+\tcbuselibrary{skins,xparse,documentation,breakable,minted}
+\colorlet{Option}{violet}
+\colorlet{Command}{red!75!black}
+\colorlet{Environment}{blue!75!black}
+\colorlet{Value}{olive!75!black}
+\colorlet{Color}{cyan!75!black}
+\tcbset
+  { enhanced
+  , listing engine=minted
+  , minted options=
+    { breaklines
+    , fontsize=\footnotesize
+    }
+  , index format=pgf
+  , color command=Command
+  , color environment=Environment
+  , color key=Option
+  , color value=Value
+  , color color=Color
+  }
+\renewcommand{\theFancyVerbLine}{\footnotesize\itshape\color{gray}\arabic{FancyVerbLine}}
+\let\tcbcs=\cs
+\renewcommand*{\cs}[1]{\textcolor{Command}{\tcbcs{#1}}}
+\def\sqbrackets#1{%
+  \texttt{\textcolor{Option}{[}#1\textcolor{Option}{]}}}
+\def\brackets#1{%
+  \texttt{\textcolor{Environment}{\char`\{}#1\textcolor{Environment}{\char`\}}}}
+\def\marg#1{%
+  \textcolor{Environment}{\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}\textcolor{Environment}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
+\newcommand*{\env}[1]{\textcolor{Environment}{\ttfamily #1}}
+\newcommand*{\key}[1]{\textcolor{Option}{\ttfamily #1}}
+\newcommand*{\val}[1]{\textcolor{Value}{\ttfamily #1}}
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\resetmintedformat}{%
+  % Comments
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@c\endcsname{\let\PYGdefault@it=\textit\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{gray}{####1}}}
+  % Command sequences
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@k\endcsname{\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{Command}{####1}}}
+  % Optional arguments
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@na\endcsname{\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{Option}{####1}}}
+  % Braces
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@nb\endcsname{\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{Environment}{####1}}}
+}
+\apptocmd{\minted@checkstyle}{\resetmintedformat}{}{}
+\makeatother
+
+\RecustomVerbatimEnvironment
+  {Verbatim}{Verbatim}
+  {commentchar=\%}
+
+\usepackage{xpatch,csquotes,multicol}
+
+\usepackage
+[backend=biber%
+,hyperref=false%
+]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{oxref.bib}
+\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{900}
+\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{800}
+\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{700}
+\DeclareBibliographyCategory{hidden}
+\makeatletter
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usedriver
+     {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}}
+     {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{postnote}\finentrypunct}
+\makeatother
+\DeclareSourcemap{%
+  \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+    \map[overwrite=true]{%
+      \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+\hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
+\usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
+\crefname{page}{page}{pages}
+
+\NewDocumentCommand{\pkg}{om}{%
+  \IfNoValueTF{#1}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1-#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\lit}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\code}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\aside}[1]{\textcolor{violet}{[\textsc{tip:} #1]}}
+\newcommand{\tip}[1]{\hangfrom{\makebox[2em][c]{\faLightbulbO}}#1\par}
+\newcommand{\info}[1]{\hangfrom{\makebox[2em][c]{\faInfoCircle}}#1\par}
+\newcommand{\hack}[1]{\hangfrom{\makebox[2em][c]{\faWrench}}#1\par}
+
+\makeatletter
+\def\CiteStatus{todo}
+\newcommand{\dbgcolor}[2]{%
+  \bgroup
+  \blx@citecmdinit
+  \blx@citeinit
+  \def\blx@precode{}%
+  \def\blx@postcode{}%
+  \def\blx@loopcode{%
+    \iffieldundef{userd}
+    {\xdef\CiteStatus{ok}}
+    {\xdef\CiteStatus{\abx@field@userd}}}%
+  \blx@citeloop{#1}%
+  \textcolor{\CiteStatus}{#2}%
+  \egroup
+}
+\makeatother
+\NewTColorBox{bibexbox}{D(){ok}d<>omo}%
+  {bicolor
+  ,colframe = #1
+  ,colback = #1!5!white
+  ,colbacklower = white
+  ,fontlower = \footnotesize
+  ,before upper = {\hangfrom{\booksym\space}\biburlsetup}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#3}%
+    {after upper = {\par\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}\fullcite{#4}}
+    }%
+    {after upper = {\par\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}\fullcite[#3]{#4}}
+    ,title = {\texttt{\string\fullcite[#3]\{#4\}}}
+    }
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#2}{}%
+    {overlay = {
+      \node[anchor=south east,text=teal] at (frame.south east) {#2};
+      }
+    }
+  ,phantomlabel={ex:#4}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#5}{}{#5}
+  }
+\NewTotalTColorBox{\spec}{m}%
+  {enhanced
+  ,sharp corners = west
+  ,colframe = teal
+  ,colback = teal!5!white
+  ,toprule = 0pt
+  ,bottomrule = 0pt
+  ,rightrule = 0pt
+  }{#1}
+\NewTCBListing{egcite}{D(){ok}omo}%
+  {colframe = #1
+  ,colback = #1!5!white
+  ,listing side text
+  ,lefthand width = 14em
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#2}{}{title = #2}
+  ,before lower = {\raggedright\ifblank{#3}{}{\hangfrom{\booksym\space}#3\par}\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#4}{}{#4}}
+\NewTCBListing{egcite*}{D(){ok}omo}%
+  {colframe = #1
+  ,colback = #1!5!white
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#2}{}{title = #2}
+  ,before lower = {\raggedright\ifblank{#3}{}{\hangfrom{\booksym\space}#3\par}\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#4}{}{#4}}
+
+\frenchspacing
+
+\usepackage[british]{isodate}
+\usepackage{readprov}
+\GetFileInfo{\jobname.tex}
+\title{OXALPH -- An alphabetic style for Biblatex}
+\author{Alex Ball}
+\date{\printdateTeX{\filedate}}
+\begin{document}
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+\begin{adjustwidth}{.2\textwidth}{0pt}
+  \sffamily\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
+  \LARGE\textsc{oxref bundle}
+
+  \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+  \LARGE\thetitle
+
+  \bigskip
+  \Large\theauthor
+
+  \bigskip
+  \Large\thedate
+
+  \bigskip
+  \Large\fileversion
+\end{adjustwidth}
+
+\vspace{\stretch{3}}
+\noindent
+\hspace*{.1\textwidth}\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\rule{\normalrulethickness}{\textheight}}
+
+\newpage
+\tableofcontents*
+
+\chapter{Introduction}
+
+\section{Loading the style}\label{sec:loading}
+
+The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}:
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\usepackage[style=oxalph]{biblatex}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
+
+\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
+  Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
+  By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\docValue{literal}
+    means no special handling is used.
+  \item\docValue{long}
+    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+    in the bibliography.
+  \item\docValue{short}
+    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+    in the bibliography.
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{dashed}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  In the biblography, replaces recurring author\slash editor names with a dash.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{ecli}{=\val{yes}|\val{only}|\val{no}}{default \val{yes}, initially \val{yes}}
+  Determines when ECLI numbers for EU legal cases are printed (if provided).
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\docValue{yes}
+    prints the ECLI number in addition to the official report.
+  \item\docValue{only}
+    prints the ECLI number instead of the official report.
+  \item\docValue{no}
+    only prints the ECLI number if the case is otherwise unreported.
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{isourls}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
+  Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\docValue{slash}
+    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+  \item\docValue{colon}
+    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
+  \item\docValue{comma}
+    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+  \item\docValue{parens}
+    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
+  Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
+  The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
+  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
+  Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+  Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
+  Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{relationpunct}{=\val{period}|\val{comma}|\val{semicolon}|\val{colon}|\val{space}}{default \val{semicolon}, initially \val{semicolon}}
+  Sets the punctuation that precedes the \code{relatedtype} localization string.
+  An additional space is assumed unless the value is \val{space}.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+  Note that the general and per-type settings are ignored for some values of \code{relatedtype},
+  but the per-entry setting is always effective.
+\end{docKey}
+
+
+\begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{usenametitles}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{true}}
+  Controls whether titular prefixes such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed.
+  (See \cref{sec:nametitles} for how to supply titles as part of a name.)
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
+It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
+In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
+
+\section{How to use this document}
+
+Bibliographical items are given throughout this document, and serve three purposes:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item
+  To demonstrate which of the variations discussed by the
+  \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} have been chosen
+  in this style.
+  \item
+  To help me, as package author, check that the style is working as intended.
+  \item
+  To show you, as document author, how to use the style to get the effect you want.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Examples that follow standard \textsf{biblatex} semantics, and are therefore
+(mostly) portable to other styles, are in green:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}%
+  [bicolor
+  ,colframe = ok
+  ,colback = ok!5!white
+  ,colbacklower = white
+  ,fontlower = \footnotesize\ttfamily
+  ,overlay = {\node[anchor=south east,text=teal] at (frame.south east) {Source};}
+  ]
+  \hangfrom{\booksym\space} Reference text as it should look.\par
+  \hangfrom{\cogsym\space} Reference text as generated by \textsf{biblatex}.
+  \tcblower
+  Code used in bibliography file.
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
+Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+to other styles, are in amber:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}%
+  [bicolor
+  ,colframe = hacked
+  ,colback = hacked!5!white
+  ,colbacklower = white
+  ,fontlower = \footnotesize\ttfamily
+  ,overlay = {\node[anchor=south east,text=teal] at (frame.south east) {Source};}
+  ]
+  \hangfrom{\booksym\space} Reference text as it should look.\par
+  \hangfrom{\cogsym\space} Reference text as generated by \textsf{biblatex}.
+  \tcblower
+  Code used in bibliography file.
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
+Where a source is provided, it refers to a section from one of the reference works below:
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[OGS]
+\fullcite{ritter2002ogs}
+
+\item[NHR]
+\fullcite{waddingham2014nhr}
+\end{description}
+
+Where the source is starred (*), this indicates the example is not quite how it appears in the book,
+usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} default.
+Where the source is marked with a dagger (\textdagger),
+this indicates that the example has been coverted from an \textsf{oxnotes}-style one,
+since the guides provide relatively few for author-year references.
+
+\section{Design philosophy}
+
+The stipulations given by the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} regarding citations and references
+amount not so much to a consistent style as a body of advice for creating one.
+Unlike the style manuals published by the American Psychological Association,
+the Modern Language Association, and the University of Chicago to name but three,
+the emphasis of the Oxford guide is to describe good practice rather than prescribe a particular style.
+This means that when it comes to \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, there are decisions to be made
+as to which variations to support by default, which to support as options,
+and which to ignore quietly.
+
+The situation is complicated further by the nature of the available versions.
+The 2002 guide remains the most comprehensive in terms of rules, principles and examples.
+The succeeding versions, under the title \emph{New Hart's Rules},
+update the aspects of the 2002 guide that now seem somewhat dated,
+such as its handling of URLs and DOIs,
+and have more of an eye on machine processing of bibliographies.
+They do, however, introduce additional variations with less of a steer on what is preferred,
+and are considerably shorter with fewer examples.
+
+The approach of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible,
+but where variations are given without strong preference, or where guidance is lacking,
+to follow the preferences of the 2002 guide.
+Where the practices of the humanities and the sciences are contrasted,
+the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum}
+and the latter for \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear}.
+Where neither version gives explicit guidance on citing a resource supported by \textsf{biblatex},
+\pkg[biblatex]{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex}
+and other major referencing styles.
+
+Where it is practical to do so,
+ways and means of achieving the variations defined by the two guides are provided,
+but by no means all of them will be supported.
+
+\section{Technical documentation}
+
+For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
+see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
+
+\section{To do}
+
+The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
+As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
+interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
+styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
+thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
+At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
+behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
+
+I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
+are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
+rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
+I would be most glad to hear from you:
+
+\begin{multicols}{3}
+  \begin{itemize}\firmlist
+    \item suppbook
+    \item booklet
+    \item suppcollection
+    \item patent
+    \item suppperiodical
+    \item artwork
+    \item commentary
+    \item letter
+    \item performance
+    \item standard
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{multicols}
+
+You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
+\href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
+as well.
+
+\chapter{Citations and common formatting}\label{sec:citing}
+
+The \textsf{oxalph} bibliography style is intended for use with an alphabetic citation style,
+and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one.
+
+\section{Test citations}
+
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+Test \parencites%
+  [93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
+  [72]{hankinson1989gba}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+
+\subsection{Missing attribution}
+
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{anon1822san}
+Anon.\@ (1822), \emph{Stories after Nature} (London: Allman).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{anon1822san,
+  author = {Anonymous},
+  title = {Stories after Nature},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Allman},
+  date = {1822}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{anon1956lu}
+Anon.\@ (1956), \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{anon1956lu,
+  author = {Anonymous},
+  title = {Liber usualis},
+  location = {Tournai},
+  publisher = {Desclée},
+  year = {1956}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{anon1822san,anon1956lu}
+\end{egcite}
+
+
+\subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
+Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
+to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
+}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{boethius1976dds}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{boethius1976dds}
+Boethius (Ps.-) (1976), \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. O.\ Weijers (Leiden).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{boethius1976dds,
+  author = {Boethius},
+  author+an = {1=pseudo},
+  title = {De disciplina scolarium},
+  subtitle = {Édition critique, introduction et notes},
+  editor = {Olga Weijers},
+  location = {Leiden},
+  date = {1976}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Inferred attribution}
+
+If the attribution is missing from the work but may be inferred from other sources,
+Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field
+  (usually \code{author} or \code{editor}) with the keyword \code{inferred}.
+  You can also annotate names individually within the list, if only some of them should be taken as inferred.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{balfour1768pe}
+{[Balfour, J.]} (1768), \emph{Philosophical Essays} (Edinburgh).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{balfour1768pe,
+  author = {James Balfour},
+  author+an = {=inferred},
+  title = {Philosophical Essays},
+  location = {Edinburgh},
+  date = {1768}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
+  If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
+  The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+
+\subsection{Pseudonyms}
+
+If an author publishes under a pen name, and you want to link the names in the bibliography,
+the name as given in the work should be given first, immediately followed by the other name
+in parentheses (\emph{Oxford Guide to Style}) or brackets (\emph{New Hart's Rules}).
+
+\tip{If you don't mind the second name being printed as-is,
+  the canonical place to include it is the \code{nameaddon} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2\textdagger>
+{dodgson1896sl}
+Dodgson, C. L. [Lewis Carroll] (1896), \emph{Symbolic Logic} (Oxford).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{dodgson1896sl,
+  author = {C. L. Dodgson},
+  nameaddon = {Lewis Carroll},
+  title = {Symbolic Logic},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1896}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{You can switch to using parentheses for name addons by changing the \code{nameaddon} field format.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{nameaddon}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+\tip{If you do want the second name to be normalized, or you are dealing with a list of names,
+  you can use the (non-standard) \code{authoraddon} and \code{editoraddon} fields. The addon
+  name will be printed after the corresponding name in the regular name list, using the
+  \code{nameaddon} field format, but only if it is different.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2\textdagger>
+{lauder1965lss}
+Lauder, A. [Morrison, A.] (1965), \emph{Let Stalk Strine} (Sydney).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{lauder1965lss,
+  author = {Afferbeck Lauder},
+  authoraddon = {Alistair Morrison},
+  title = {Let Stalk Strine},
+  location = {Sydney},
+  date = {1965}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Again, you can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
+  If you specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{authoraddon}.
+  The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.}
+
+\section{Name variants}
+
+In cases where an author changes the name under which they publish (e.g.\ due to changes of marital status), both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest putting the later form of the name first, followed by parentheses containing an equals sign and the earier form of the name.
+
+\tip{To trigger this formatting, annotate the relevant name in \code{authoraddon} or \code{editoraddon} with the keyword \code{variant}.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{joukovsky1967gdd}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.17.4\textdagger>
+{joukovsky1967gdd}
+Joukovsky, F. (= Joukovsky-Micha, F.) (1967), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29: 55–92.
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{joukovsky1967gdd,
+  author = {F. Joukovsky},
+  authoraddon = {F. Joukovsky-Micha},
+  authoraddon+an = {1=variant},
+  title = {La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e}
+    siècle (1500\textendash 1585)},
+  journaltitle = {Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance},
+  volume = {29},
+  date = {1967},
+  langid = {french},
+  pages = {55-92}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Author-translators and author-revisers}
+
+If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joint authors, Oxford style is to print them immediately after the actual author. The motivation comes from textbooks like this one:
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{kuehner.blass1890ef}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{kuehner.blass1890ef}
+Kühner, R., rev. Blass, F. (1890-2), \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{kuehner.blass1890ef,
+  author = {Raphael Kühner},
+  editor = {Friedrich Blass},
+  editor+an = {=jointauthor},
+  editortype = {reviser},
+  shortauthor = {Kühner--Blass},
+  title = {Elementar- und Formenlehre},
+  maintitle = {Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache},
+  volume = {1},
+  location = {Hannover},
+  publisher = {Hahnsche Buchhandlung},
+  date = {1890/1892}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+
+\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
+
+Generally speaking, using titular prefixes like Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on as part of an author's name is unnecessary,
+but there are occasions when removing them can cause problems, so with \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} you can supply them if you need to.
+I have not added special rules for recognizing such titles, so if you want to include one you have to label each part of the name explicitly, as in the following example (the keyword for the titular prefix is \code{title}).
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2*\textdagger>
+{wood1861el}
+Wood, Mrs H. (1861), \emph{East Lynne}, 3 vols. (London).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{wood1861el,
+  author = {title=Mrs, given=Henry, family=Wood},
+  title = {East Lynne},
+  volumes = {3},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1861}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+You can switch the display of titular prefixes on or off using the \key{usenametitles} option.
+This can be set globally or on a per-type or per-entry basis.
+
+\section{Works in foreign languages}
+
+If you used a foreign language work, you might want to recommend a good translation.
+
+\tip{Add the translation in \code{related}, and set \code{relatedtype} to \code{translationas}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.5*\textdagger>
+{tschichold1955tg}
+Tschichold, J. (1955), \emph{Typographische Gestaltung} (Basle); Eng. trans. as \emph{Asymmetric Typography} (London, 1967).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{tschichold1955tg,
+  author = {J. Tschichold},
+  title = {Typographische Gestaltung},
+  location = {Basle},
+  date = {1955},
+  related = {tschichold1967tg},
+  relatedtype = {translationas}}
+@book{tschichold1967tg,
+  title = {Asymmetric Typography},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1967}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{To specify the translator up front, set the \code{relatedtype} to \code{bytranslator} instead.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger>
+{sarrau1975ta}
+Sarrau, J. (1975), \emph{Tapas y aperitivos} (Madrid); trans. F. P. Slesinger as \emph{Tapas and Appetizers} (New York, 1987).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{sarrau1975ta,
+  author = {José Sarrau},
+  title = {Tapas y aperitivos},
+  location = {Madrid},
+  date = {1975},
+  related = {sarrau1987ta},
+  relatedtype = {bytranslator}}
+@book{sarrau1987ta,
+  author = {José Sarrau},
+  translator = {Francesca Piemonte Slesinger},
+  title = {Tapas and Appetizers},
+  location = {New York},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+If you used the translation, you might want to give the original publication as well.
+
+\tip{Add the original in \code{related}, and set \code{relatedtype} to \code{translationof}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.5\textdagger>
+{metz1938hyb}
+Metz, R. (1938), \emph{A Hundred Years of British Philosophy}, ed. J. H. Muirhead, trans. J. W. Harvey [Ger. orig., \emph{Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien} (1935)]
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{metz1938hyb,
+  author = {R. Metz},
+  title = {A Hundred Years of British Philosophy},
+  editor = {J. H. Muirhead},
+  translator = {J. W. Harvey},
+  date = {1938},
+  related = {metz1935psg},
+  relatedtype = {translationof}}
+@book{metz1935psg,
+  title = {Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien},
+  date = {1935},
+  language = {german}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is often helpful to provide an informative translation of foreign language titles.
+
+\tip{Put the translation in \code{titleaddon}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.5\textdagger>
+{nissan1965hnm}
+Nissan Motor Corporation (1965), \emph{Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi} [A 30-year history of Nissan Motors].
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{nissan1965hnm,
+  author = {{Nissan Motor Corporation}},
+  title = {Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi},
+  titleaddon = {A 30-year history of Nissan Motors},
+  date = {1965}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Conversely, it might be helpful to provide the English original of a translated title.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{milne1938pb}
+Milne, A. A. (1938), \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam: Williams).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{milne1938pb,
+  author = {A. A. Milne},
+  title = {Pu der Bär},
+  language = {german},
+  origtitle = {Winnie the Pooh},
+  location = {Potsdam},
+  publisher = {Williams},
+  date = {1938}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Missing place of publication}
+
+For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
+
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
+  This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.9\textdagger>
+{padua1961p}
+Marchetto of Padua (1961), \emph{Pomerium}, ed. G. Vecchi (n.p.).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{padua1961p,
+  author = {{Marchetto of Padua}},
+  title = {Pomerium},
+  editor = {Guiseppe Vecchi},
+  date = {1961},
+  options = {nolocation}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
+\chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
+
+\section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{hollingsworth1957dsb}
+Hollingsworth, T. H. (1957), \enquote{A Demographic Study of the British Ducal Families}, \emph{Population Studies}, 11/1: 4–26.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{hollingsworth1957dsb,
+  author = {T. H. Hollingsworth},
+  date = {1957},
+  title = {A Demographic Study of the British Ducal Families},
+  journaltitle = {Population Studies},
+  volume = {11},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {4-26}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2*>
+{unwin1994sce}
+Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Command Economy to Privatisation}, \emph{Geography}, 79/3: 246–61.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{unwin1994sce,
+  author = {Tim Unwin},
+  date = {1994},
+  title = {Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture},
+  subtitle = {From Command Economy to Privatisation},
+  journaltitle = {Geography},
+  volume = {79},
+  number = {3},
+  pages = {246-261}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{vaucouleurs1975nmn}
+Vaucouleurs, G. de, et al. (1975), \enquote{The New Martian Nomenclature of the International Astronomical Union}, \emph{Icarus}, 26: 85--98.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{vaucouleurs1975nmn,
+  author = {Gerald de Vaucouleurs and J. Blunck and M. Davies and A. Dollfus and I. Koval and
+    G. Kuiper and H. Masursky and S. Miyamoto and V Moroz and Carl Sagan},
+  title = {The New {Martian} Nomenclature of the {International} {Astronomical} {Union}},
+  journaltitle = {Icarus},
+  volume = {26},
+  date = {1975},
+  pages = {85-98}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{druin2002rcd}
+Druin, A. (2002), \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, \emph{Behaviour \& Information Technology}, 21/1: 1–25. doi: \path{10.1080/01449290110108659}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{druin2002rcd,
+  author = {A. Druin},
+  title = {The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology},
+  journaltitle = {Behaviour \& Information Technology},
+  volume = {21},
+  number = {1},
+  date = {2002},
+  pages = {1-25},
+  doi = {10.1080/01449290110108659}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
+{li.etal2013flh}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{li.etal2013flh,
+  author = {Shu Li and Chungkun Shih and Chen Wang and Hong Pang and Dong Ren},
+  title = {Forever Love},
+  subtitle = {The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China},
+  journaltitle = {{PLoS ONE}},
+  volume = {8},
+  number = {11},
+  date = {2013},
+  eid = {e78188},
+  doi = {10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1*\textdagger>
+{jsr1990spt}
+\enquote{Solar Photon Thruster} (1990), \emph{Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets}, 28/4 (July–Aug.): 411–6.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{jsr1990spt,
+  title = {Solar Photon Thruster},
+  journaltitle = {Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets},
+  volume = {28},
+  number = {4},
+  date = {1990-07/1990-08},
+  pages = {411-416}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Articles in periodicals with series}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, nth \lit{ser}., Vol/Number: Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.3.3\textdagger>
+{moody1953mdb}
+Moody, T. W. (1953), \enquote{Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906}, \emph{Transactions of the Royal Historical Society}, 5th ser., 3: 53--76.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{moody1953mdb,
+  author = {T. W. Moody},
+  title = {Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906},
+  journaltitle = {Transactions of the Royal Historical Society},
+  series = {5},
+  volume = {3},
+  date = {1953},
+  pages = {53-76}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, \textsc{ns} Vol/Number, Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2*>
+{hankinson1989gba}
+Hankinson, R. J. (1989), \enquote{Galen and the Best of All Possible Worlds}, \emph{CQ}, \textsc{ns} 39: 43–76.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{hankinson1989gba,
+  author = {R. J. Hankinson},
+  date = {1989},
+  title = {Galen and the Best of All Possible Worlds},
+  journaltitle = {CQ},
+  series = {newseries},
+  volume = {39},
+  pages = {43–76}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Articles in issues identified by date alone}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Day Month: Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2*>
+{marx1842kaa}
+Marx, K. (1842), \enquote{Der Kommunismus und die Augsburger \enquote{Allgemeine Zeitung}}, \emph{Rheinische Zeitung}, 16 Oct.: 1–2.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{marx1842kaa,
+  author = {Karl Marx},
+  title = {Der Kommunismus und die Augsburger \enquote{Allgemeine Zeitung}},
+  journaltitle = {Rheinische Zeitung},
+  date = {1842-10-16},
+  pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{The above example as it appears in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} is both incomplete and wildly inaccurate.
+  I have completed and corrected it as best I can ascertain.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{who1983nsb}
+WHO (World Health Organization) (1983), \enquote{Nutrition: Sex Bias of Nutritional Status of Children 0–4 Years}, \emph{Weekly Epidemiologial Record}, 20 May.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{who1983nsb,
+  shortauthor = {WHO},
+  author = {{World Health Organization}},
+  date = {1983-05-20},
+  title = {Nutrition},
+  subtitle = {Sex Bias of Nutritional Status of Children 0–4 Years},
+  journaltitle = {Weekly Epidemiologial Record}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3\textdagger>
+{boyce1957pgi}
+Boyce, M. (1957), \enquote{The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition}, \emph{Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society}: 10--45.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{boyce1957pgi,
+  author = {M. Boyce},
+  title = {The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition},
+  journaltitle = {Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society},
+  date = {1957},
+  pages = {10-45}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Works published as an issue}
+
+These examples illustrate where a book is also published as a whole
+issue of a periodical, and show how you may reference both at once.
+You can either add the periodical details to a book entry
+or add the book details to a periodical entry.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Location: Publisher), pages.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{equals} as the \code{relatedtype}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger>
+{bec1976isc}
+Bec, C. (1976) (ed.), \emph{Italie 1500--1550: Une situation de crise?} = \emph{Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin}, 1975/2 (Langues étrangères, 2; Lyon), 99--109.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@collection{bec1976isc,
+  editor = {C. Bec},
+  title = {Italie 1500--1550},
+  subtitle = {Une situation de crise?},
+  related = {aujm1975.2},
+  relatedtype = {equals},
+  series = {Langues étrangères},
+  number = {2},
+  location = {Lyon},
+  date = {1976},
+  pages = {99--109}}
+@periodical{aujm1975.2,
+  title = {Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin},
+  volume = {1975},
+  number = {2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{issuetitle} instead of \code{title} to get the right formatting.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger>
+{trisoglio1973gnq}
+Trisoglio, F. (1973), \emph{Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)} = \emph{Rivista Iasalliana}, 40.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{trisoglio1973gnq,
+  author = {F. Trisoglio},
+  issuetitle = {Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)},
+  journaltitle = {Rivista Iasalliana},
+  volume = {40},
+  date = {1973}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Articles in an issue that is a supplement to another issue}
+
+\DeclareNumChars*{S}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number; \lit{Supplement to} \emph{MainJournalTitle} Vol/Number: Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the parent issue, reference it in the \code{related} field, and use the key \code{suppto} as the \code{relatedtype}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger>
+{zhentao.etal1989ars}
+Zhentao, X., Yau, K. K. C., and Stephenson, F. R. (1989) \enquote{Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones}, \emph{Archaeoastronomy}, 14; Supplement to \emph{Journal for the History of Astronomy}, 20, pp. S61--S72.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{zhentao.etal1989ars,
+  author = {X. Zhentao and K. K. C. Yau and F. R. Stephenson},
+  title = {Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones},
+  journaltitle = {Archaeoastronomy},
+  volume = {14},
+  date = {1989},
+  related = {jha1989},
+  relatedtype = {suppto},
+  pages = {S61-S72},
+  bookpagination = {page}}
+@periodical{jha1989,
+  title = {Journal for the History of Astronomy},
+  volume = {20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+
+\section{Articles that span multiple issues}
+
+\tip{Use the key \code{serialarticle} as the \code{relatedtype}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S 17.3*>
+{stookey1974ssp}
+Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab Republic}, \emph{Middle East Journal}, 28/3: 248–60; 28/4: 409–19.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{stookey1974ssp,
+  author = {R. W. Stookey},
+  date = {1974},
+  title = {Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab Republic},
+  journaltitle = {Middle East Journal},
+  volume = {28},
+  number = {3},
+  pages = {248-260},
+  related = {stookey1974ssp2},
+  relatedtype = {serialarticle}}
+@article{stookey1974ssp2,
+  crossref = {stookey1974ssp},
+  options = {dataonly},
+  volume = {28},
+  number = {4},
+  pages = {409-419}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Accepted journal articles, pre-publication}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{to be published in} \emph{JournalTitle}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{briscoe2008esp}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{briscoe2008esp,
+  author = {Robert Briscoe},
+  title = {Egocentric Spatial Representation in Action and Perception},
+  journaltitle = {Philosophy and Phenomenological Research},
+  url = {http://cogprints.org/5780/1/ECSRAP.F07.pdf},
+  pubstate = {inpress}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Reviews}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger>
+{dean1995rpb}
+Dean, J. (1995), review of P. Basiron (1994), \emph{My Early Life} (Bourges), in \emph{Res facta}, 17: 56--9.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@review{dean1995rpb,
+  author = {J. Dean},
+  related = {basiron1994mel},
+  relatedtype = {reviewof},
+  journaltitle = {Res facta},
+  volume = {17},
+  date = {1995},
+  pages = {56-59}}
+@book{basiron1994mel,
+  author = {Philippe Basiron},
+  title = {My Early Life},
+  location = {Bourges},
+  date = {1994}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger>
+{jocelyn1989pav}
+Jocelyn, H. D. (1989), \enquote{Probus and Virgil}, review of M. L. Delvigo (1987), \emph{Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta} (Pisa), in \emph{CR}, \textsc{ns} 39: 27--8.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@review{jocelyn1989pav,
+  author = {H. D. Jocelyn},
+  title = {Probus and Virgil},
+  related = {delvigo1987tvt},
+  relatedtype = {reviewof},
+  journaltitle = {CR},
+  series = {newseries},
+  volume = {39},
+  date = {1989},
+  pages = {27-28}}
+@book{delvigo1987tvt,
+  author = {Maria Luisa Delvigo},
+  title = {Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta},
+  location = {Pisa},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Books}\label{sec:book}
+\chapterprecis{book, mvbook, collection, mvcollection, reference, mvreference}
+
+\section{Monographs}
+
+Biblatex defines \code{book} as a monograph, written either by a single author, or by several authors who have joint responsibility for the entire work. An editor in this context has a modest role selecting or annotating the content, and therefore in Oxford style is given after the title even if the author is not given.
+
+\subsection{Basic form}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.5>
+{lyons1981lli}
+Lyons, J. (1981),
+\emph{Language and Linguistics: An Introduction} (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{lyons1981lli,
+  author = {John Lyons},
+  date = {1981},
+  title = {Language and Linguistics},
+  subtitle = {An Introduction},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  publisher = {Cambridge University Press}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.5>
+{lyons1981lmc}
+Lyons, J. (1981),
+\emph{Language, Meaning and Context} (London: Fontana Paperbacks).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{lyons1981lmc,
+  author = {John Lyons},
+  date = {1981},
+  title = {Language, Meaning and Context},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Fontana Paperbacks}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\subsection{No publisher}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{smith1988fag}
+Smith, T. (1988), \emph{Famine and Gender} (New Haven, Conn.).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{smith1988fag,
+  author = {Smith, T.},
+  title = {Famine and Gender},
+  date = {1988},
+  location = {New Haven, Conn.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\subsection{Edited book}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{boas.botschuyver1952dc}
+\emph{Distichia Catonis} (1952), ed. M.\ Boas and H.\ J.\ Botschuyver (Amsterdam).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{boas.botschuyver1952dc,
+  title = {Distichia Catonis},
+  editor = {Marcus Boas and Henricus Johannes Botschuyver},
+  location = {Amsterdam},
+  date = {1952}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Collections}
+
+Biblatex defines \code{collection} as a book made up of multiple self-contained contributions from distinct authors. There is no overall author: use the regular \code{book} entry type for collections of a single author’s work. The editor in this case has a more active role and therefore comes before the title.
+
+\spec{Editor (Year) (\lit{ed.}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{barnes.griffin1989pte}
+Barnes, J., and Griffin, M. T. (1989) (eds.), \emph{Philosophia Togata: Essays on Philosophy and Roman Society} (Oxford).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@collection{barnes.griffin1989pte,
+  editor = {Jonathan Barnes and Miriam T. Griffin},
+  date = {1989},
+  title = {Philosophia Togata},
+  subtitle = {Essays on Philosophy and Roman Society},
+  location = {Oxford}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{hankinson1988mmm}
+Hankinson, R. J. (1988) (ed.), \emph{Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics} (Edmonton, Alta.).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@collection{hankinson1988mmm,
+  editor = {R. J. Hankinson},
+  date = {1988},
+  title = {Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics},
+  location = {Edmonton, Alta.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Reference works}
+
+Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
+
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{fortenbaugh.etal1991tes}
+\emph{Theophrastus of Eresus: Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence} (1991), ed. W. W. Fortenbaugh et al., 2 vols. (Philosophia Antiqua, 54; Leiden).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvreference{fortenbaugh.etal1991tes,
+  title = {{Theophrastus} of {Eresus}},
+  subtitle = {Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence},
+  editor = {William W. Fortenbaugh and Pamela M Huby and Robert W. Sharples and Dimitri Gutas
+    and others},
+  volumes = {2},
+  series = {Philosophia Antiqua},
+  number = {54},
+  location = {Leiden},
+  date = {1991}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Multi-volume works}
+
+Biblatex provides additional entry types for multi-volume works: \code{mvbook}, \code{mvcollection} and \code{mvreference} respectively. These can be used to cite all the volumes at once, or just one volume from the set.
+
+\subsection{All volumes}
+
+Where all volumes were published consistently, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher), VolNo. Pages.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\parencite[ii.~\mkcomprange{367-368}]%
+{straeten1867lmp}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.6\textdagger>
+{straeten1867lmp}%
+Vander Straeten, E. (1867--88), \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, 8 vols. (Brussels).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{straeten1867lmp,
+    author = {Edmond {Vander Straeten}},
+    title = {La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle},
+    volumes = {8},
+    location = {Brussels},
+    date = {1867/1888}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the publisher changed between volumes, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher and Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.6*\textdagger>
+{ritter1838hap}
+Ritter, H. (1838--46), \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. A. J. W. Morrison, 4~vols. (Oxford: Talboys and London: Bohn).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{ritter1838hap,
+  author = {Heinrich Ritter},
+  title = {The History of Ancient Philosophy},
+  translator = {Alexander J. W. Morrison},
+  volumes = {4},
+  location = {Oxford and London},
+  publisher = {Talboys and Bohn},
+  date = {1838/1846}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Style Manual}, the translator in the above reference
+  is in parentheses; this occurs in one other reference (\S15.2.2, Lawrence 1992),
+  but in many more does not (\S15.2.15, Bischoff 1990; \S15.8, Auden 1990;
+  all in \S13.11.1). I am therefore choosing to ignore this unnecessary
+  complication.}
+
+\subsection{One volume from several}
+
+Where the volumes are merely numbered, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, do not use \code{maintitle}: put the title of the whole work in \code{title}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{annas1983osa}
+Annas, J. (1983) (ed.), \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, i (Oxford).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvcollection{annas1983osa,
+  editor = {Annas, Julia},
+  date = {1983},
+  title = {Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy},
+  volume = {1},
+  location = {Oxford}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title,
+and they were all published at once (more or less),
+the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use \code{title} for the volume title and \code{maintitle} for the whole work.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.2\textdagger>
+{brady.etal1994hehsa}
+Brady, Jr., T. A., Oberman, H. A., and Tracy, J. D. (1994) (eds.), \emph{Handbook of European History, 1400–1600: Late Middle Ages, Renaissance and Reformation}, i: \emph{Structures and Assertions} (Leiden: E. J. Brill).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvcollection{brady.etal1994hehsa,
+  editor = {Brady, Jr., Thomas A. and Heiko A. Oberman and James D. Tracy},
+  maintitle = {Handbook of European History, 1400–1600},
+  mainsubtitle = {{Late} {Middle} {Ages,} {Renaissance} and {Reformation}},
+  volume = {1},
+  title = {Structures and Assertions},
+  location = {Leiden},
+  publisher = {E. J. Brill},
+  date = {1994}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\parencite[42-56]%
+  {ward.waller1932che}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.6\textdagger>
+{ward.waller1932che}
+Ward, A. W., and Waller, A. E. (1932) (eds.), \emph{The Cambridge History of English Literature}, xii: \emph{The Nineteenth Century} (Cambridge: CUP).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvcollection{ward.waller1932che,
+  editor = {A. W. Ward and A. E. Waller},
+  maintitle = {The Cambridge History of English Literature},
+  volume = {12},
+  title = {The Nineteenth Century},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  publisher = {CUP},
+  date = {1932}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title,
+and there are many volumes spanning years and possibly publishers,
+the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{VolTitle}, [\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title] (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use \code{book} instead of \code{mvbook}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.7\textdagger>
+{fischer1989asf}
+Fischer, D. H. (1989), \emph{Albion’s Seed: Four British Folkways in America}, [vol.\ i of \emph{America: A Cultural History}] (New York: Oxford University Press).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{fischer1989asf,
+  author = {David Hackett Fischer},
+  title = {Albion’s Seed},
+  subtitle = {Four British Folkways in America},
+  volume = {1},
+  maintitle = {America},
+  mainsubtitle = {A Cultural History},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {Oxford University Press},
+  date = {1989}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Additions, translations, and revisions}
+
+Where works have significant introductions, forewords, afterwords, illustrations, etc.\ this may be noted as follows:
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{with an} Addition \lit{by} Contributor (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
+{twain1971cyk}
+Twain, M. (1971), \emph{A Connecticut Yankee at King Arthur's Court}, with an introduction by J. Kaplan (Harmondsworth: Penguin).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{twain1971cyk,
+  author = {Mark Twain},
+  title = {A {Connecticut} Yankee at {King} {Arthur's} Court},
+  introduction = {Justin Kaplan},
+  location = {Harmondsworth},
+  publisher = {Penguin},
+  date = {1971}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Translators are credited as follows:
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.} Translator(s) (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger>
+{bischoff1990lpa}
+Bischoff, B. (1990), \emph{Latin Palaeography: Antiquity and the Middle Ages}, trans. D. Ó Cróinín and D. Ganz (Cambridge).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{bischoff1990lpa,
+  author = {Bernhard Bischoff},
+  title = {Latin Palaeography},
+  subtitle = {Antiquity and the Middle Ages},
+  translator = {Dáibhi Ó Cróinín and David Ganz},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  date = {1990}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.\ with} Addition Translator(s) (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger>
+{martorell1984tlb}
+Martorell, J. (1984), \emph{Tirant lo Blanc}, trans. with foreword D. H. Rosenthal (London).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{martorell1984tlb,
+  author = {Joanat Martorell},
+  title = {Tirant lo Blanc},
+  translator = {David H. Rosenthal},
+  foreword = {David H. Rosenthal},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1984}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Editions}
+
+\subsection{Later edition only}
+
+Where the author\slash editor is common to both, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+
+\tip{This is the format used by the entry type \code{book}}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2*>
+{maitland2001mvr}
+Maitland, G. (2001), \emph{Maitland's Vertebral Manipulation} (6th edn., Oxford: Butterworth--Heinemann).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{maitland2001mvr,
+  author = {G. Maitland},
+  title = {Maitland's Vertebral Manipulation},
+  edition = {6},
+  publisher = {Butterworth--Heinemann},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {2001}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{beckford1823v}
+Beckford, W. (1823), \emph{Vathek} (4th edn., London) [online facsimile], \url{http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{beckford1823v,
+  author = {William Beckford},
+  title = {Vathek},
+  edition = {4},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1823},
+  howpublished = {online facsimile},
+  url = {http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the editor has changed, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), nth \lit{edn.}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\tip{This format is used by entry type \code{reference}}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.3\textdagger>
+{knowles1999odq}
+\emph{The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations} (1999), 5th edn., ed. E. Knowles (Oxford).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@reference{knowles1999odq,
+  title = {The {Oxford} Dictionary of Quotations},
+  edition = {5},
+  editor = {Elizabeth Knowles},
+  publisher = {Oxford},
+  date = {1999}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Both first and later edition}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Year; nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+
+\tip{Use the \code{orig} fields for the earlier edition.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{marx1867ccp}
+Marx, K. (1867), \emph{Capital: A Critique of Political Economy}, i, trans. B. Fowkes (New York, 1977).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{marx1867ccp,
+  author = {K. Marx},
+  origdate = {1867},
+  title = {Capital},
+  subtitle = {A Critique of Political Economy},
+  volume = {1},
+  translator = {B. Fowkes},
+  location = {New York},
+  date = {1977}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\subsection{Republications}
+
+If the publication has not been revised, but has been re-typeset by a different publisher,
+the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests putting the original date in a note at the end,
+rather than within the publication block%
+, but this does not affect the author–date style since the original date is at the head of the reference anyway.
+
+\spec{Author (OrigYear), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.3\textdagger>
+{bettelheim1976uem}
+Bettelheim, B. (1976), \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales} (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1988).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{bettelheim1976uem,
+  author = {Bruno Bettelheim},
+  title = {The Uses of Enchantment},
+  subtitle = {The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales},
+  location = {Harmondsworth},
+  publisher = {Penguin Books},
+  date = {1988},
+  origdate = {1976}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Reprints}
+
+\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
+
+\tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger>
+{adam.tannery1897odd}
+Adam, C. and Tannery, D. (1897--1913) (eds.), \emph{Œuvres de Descartes} (Paris: Cerf; repr. Paris: J. Vrin, CNRS, 1964--76).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@collection{adam.tannery1897odd,
+  editor = {C. Adam and D. Tannery},
+  title = {Œuvres de Descartes},
+  origlocation = {Paris},
+  origpublisher = {Cerf},
+  origdate = {1897/1913},
+  edition = {reprint},
+  location = {Paris},
+  publisher = {J. Vrin, CNRS},
+  date = {1964/1976}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger>
+{southern1991sap}
+Southern, R. W. (1991), \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. repr., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{southern1991sap,
+  author = {R. W. Southern},
+  title = {Saint Anselm},
+  subtitle = {A Portrait in a Landscape},
+  edition = {revisedreprint},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  publisher = {Cambridge University Press},
+  date = {1991}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+
+\tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger>
+{allen1594kkk}
+Allen, E. (1594), \emph{A Knack to Know a Knave} (London; facs. edn., Oxford: Malone Society Reprints, 1963).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{allen1594kkk,
+  author = {E. Allen},
+  title = {A Knack to Know a Knave},
+  origlocation = {London},
+  origdate = {1594},
+  edition = {facsimile},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  publisher = {Malone Society Reprints},
+  date = {1963}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Title changes}
+
+\emph{New Hart's Rules} recommends giving the original publication details first,
+then the new title and its details after a semicolon.
+
+\tip{The standard \code{relatedtype} value \code{reprintas} is supported.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.13\textdagger>
+{hare1949wwb}
+Hare, C. (1949), \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London); repr. as \emph{The Wind Blows Death} (London, 1987).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{hare1949wwb,
+  author = {Cyril Hare},
+  title = {When the Wind Blows},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1949},
+  related = {hare1987wbd},
+  relatedtype = {reprintas}}
+@book{hare1987wbd,
+  author = {Cyril Hare},
+  title = {The Wind Blows Death},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{A more generalized version of this relation is available.
+  If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas},
+  the edition and any editorial contributions will be printed in the linking text.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.128\textdagger>
+{berkenhout1769onh}
+Berkenhout, J. (1769–72), \emph{Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 3 vols. (London); rev. edn., as \emph{A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 2 vols. (London, 1789).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{berkenhout1769onh,
+  author = {John Berkenhout},
+  title = {Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain},
+  volumes = {3},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1769/1772},
+  related = {berkenhout1789snh},
+  relatedtype = {editedas}}
+@mvbook{berkenhout1789snh,
+  author = {John Berkenhout},
+  title = {A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain},
+  volumes = {2},
+  edition = {revised},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1789}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.13\textdagger>
+{lower1665dtw}
+Lower, R. (1665), \emph{Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.} (London); facs. edn. with introduction, ed. and trans. K. Dewhurst, as \emph{Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}: A Defence of the Experimental Method} (Oxford, 1983).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{lower1665dtw,
+  author = {Richard Lower},
+  title = {Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus
+    Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1665},
+  related = {dewhurst1983rlv},
+  relatedtype = {editedas}}
+@book{dewhurst1983rlv,
+  author = {Richard Lower},
+  introduction = {Kenneth Dewhurst},
+  editor = {Kenneth Dewhurst},
+  translator = {Kenneth Dewhurst},
+  title = {Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}},
+  subtitle = {A Defence of the Experimental Method},
+  edition = {facsimile},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1983}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Co-publications\slash co-editions}
+
+If the work is published under two different titles, it is a good idea to
+provide both to make it easier to locate.
+
+\tip{Use a generic relation and specify the country details in the \code{relatedstring}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.5\textdagger>
+{salinger1953ns}
+Salinger, J. D. (1953), \emph{Nine Stories} (Boston: Little, Brown), published in the UK as \emph{For Esmé---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories} (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1953).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{salinger1953ns,
+  author = {J. D. Salinger},
+  title = {Nine Stories},
+  location = {Boston},
+  publisher = {Little, Brown},
+  date = {1953},
+  related = {salinger1953few},
+  relatedstring = {published in the UK as},
+  options = {relationpunct=comma}}
+@book{salinger1953few,
+  title = {For {Esmé}---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Hamish Hamilton},
+  date = {1953}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Works from a series}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Series; Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{barnes1982ari}
+Barnes, J. (1982), \emph{Aristotle} (Past Masters; Oxford).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{barnes1982ari,
+  author = {Jonathan Barnes},
+  date = {1982},
+  title = {Aristotle},
+  series = {Past Masters},
+  location = {Oxford}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (nth \lit{ser.}).}
+
+\section{Pre-publication book}
+
+\spec{Author (\lit{forthcoming}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{smithFCgaf}
+Smith, P. (forthcoming),
+\emph{Gender and Famine}, 2 vols. (London).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{smithFCgaf,
+  author = {P. Smith},
+  title = {Gender and Famine},
+  volumes = {2},
+  location = {London},
+  pubstate = {forthcoming}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\chapter{Works within books}\label{sec:inbook}
+\chapterprecis{inbook, bookinbook, suppbook, incollection, suppcollection, inreference}
+
+\section{Works in collections of a single author's works}
+
+The \code{inbook} entry type is intended for books that consist of several self-contained works by the same author, for citing one of these works.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.}, \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+
+\tip{If you provide \code{bookauthor}, and it is the same as the \code{author}, the second instance of the name will replaced by \enquote{id.}\slash \enquote{ead.}\slash \enquote{eid.}\slash \enquote{eaed.} Use the \code{gender} field to select which is used.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.11*\textdagger>
+{kristeller1979thm}
+Kristeller, P. O. (1979), \enquote{The Aristotelian Tradition}, in id., \emph{Renaissance Thought and Its Sources}, ed. M. Mooney (New York: Columbia University Press).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inbook{kristeller1979thm,
+  author = {Paul Oskar Kristeller},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {The Aristotelian Tradition},
+  bookauthor = {Paul Oskar Kristeller},
+  booktitle = {Renaissance Thought and Its Sources},
+  editor = {Michael Mooney},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {Columbia University Press},
+  date = {1979}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
+{ashton1991d}
+Ashton, J. (1991), \enquote{Dualism}, in \emph{Understanding the Fourth Gospel} (Oxford), 205–37.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inbook{ashton1991d,
+  author = {John Ashton},
+  title = {Dualism},
+  booktitle = {Understanding the Fourth Gospel},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1991},
+  pages = {205-237}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Works in collections}
+
+The \code{incollection} entry type is intended for citing one of a collection of self-contained works by different authors.
+
+\subsection{Works in a mixed collection}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} Editors (\lit{eds.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2>
+{magarey1988ect}
+Magarey, M. E. (1988), \enquote{Examination of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine}, in R. Grant (ed.), \emph{Physical Therapy of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine} (New York: Churchill Livingstone), 81–109.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@incollection{magarey1988ect,
+  author = {M. E. Magarey},
+  date = {1988},
+  title = {Examination of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine},
+  editor = {R. Grant},
+  booktitle = {Physical Therapy of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {Churchill Livingstone},
+  pages = {81-109}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2>
+{jessop1997gcc}
+Jessop, B. (1997), \enquote{The Governance of Complexity and Complexity of Governance}, in A. Amin and J. Hausner (eds.), \emph{Beyond Markets and Hierarchy}, (Aldershot: Edward Elgar).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@incollection{jessop1997gcc,
+  author = {Bob Jessop},
+  date = {1997},
+  title = {The Governance of Complexity and Complexity of Governance},
+  editor = {Ash Amin and Jerzy Hausner},
+  booktitle = {Beyond Markets and Hierarchy},
+  location = {Aldershot},
+  publisher = {Edward Elgar}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\subsection{Works by the editor in a mixed collection}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.} (\lit{ed.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+
+\tip{If you provide the same values for \code{author} and \code{editor}, the editor name will replaced by \enquote{id.}\slash \enquote{ead.}\slash \enquote{eid.}\slash \enquote{eaed.} Use the \code{gender} field to select which is used.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3\textdagger>
+{todd1974dhp}
+Todd, W. B. (1974), \enquote{David Hume: A Preliminary Bibliography}, in id. (ed.), \emph{Hume and the Enlightenment: Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner} (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@incollection{todd1974dhp,
+  author = {W. B. Todd},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {David Hume},
+  subtitle = {A Preliminary Bibliography},
+  editor = {W. B. Todd},
+  booktitle = {Hume and the Enlightenment},
+  booksubtitle = {Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner},
+  location = {Edinburgh},
+  publisher = {Edinburgh University Press},
+  date = {1974}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Anthologies of independently published works}
+
+Biblatex provides the \code{bookinbook} entry type for citing a part of an anthology that has previously been published as a book in its own right. The main difference from \code{inbook} is how the original publication information is handled.
+
+\subsection{Later version more accessible}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} to give the date of original publication.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3\textdagger>
+{frege1892osr}
+Frege, G. (1892), \enquote{On Sense and Reference}, in id., \emph{Philosophical Writings}, trans. and ed. P. T. Geach and M. Black (Oxford: Blackwell, 1952).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@bookinbook{frege1892osr,
+  author = {G. Frege},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {On Sense and Reference},
+  bookauthor = {G. Frege},
+  booktitle = {Philosophical Writings},
+  translator = {P. T. Geach and M. Black},
+  editor = {P. T. Geach and M. Black},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  publisher = {Blackwell},
+  date = {1952},
+  origdate = {1892}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Both versions equally accessible}
+
+\tip{Put the key of the original work in \code{related}, and in \code{relatedtype} use the keyword \code{reprintfrom}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3\textdagger>
+{owen1986pi}
+Owen, G. E. L. (1986) \enquote{Philosophical Invective}, in id., \emph{Logic, Science and Dialectic}, ed. M. Nussbaum (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press), 347--64. From \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, 1 (1983): 1--25.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@bookinbook{owen1986pi,
+  author = {G. E. L. Owen},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {Philosophical Invective},
+  booktitle = {Logic, Science and Dialectic},
+  bookauthor = {G. E. L. Owen},
+  editor = {M. Nussbaum},
+  location = {Ithaca, NY},
+  publisher = {Cornell University Press},
+  date = {1986},
+  pages = {347-364},
+  related = {owen1983pi},
+  relatedtype = {reprintfrom}}
+@article{owen1983pi,
+  author = {G. E. L. Owen},
+  title = {Philosophical Invective},
+  journaltitle = {Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy},
+  volume = {1},
+  date = {1983},
+  pages = {1-25}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Articles in yearbooks and works of reference}
+
+Yearbooks may be treated either as collections or periodicals; the distinction boils down to whether you want to print the location and publisher.
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and encyclopaedias using a postnote like \code{[s.v.\@ `Tawdry']}, but for online works gives a format rather similar to yearbooks, that is, without \enquote{in}.
+
+\tip{To omit the \enquote{in} before the book title, either use the \code{inreference} entry type without specifying an editor, or use the \code{incollection} type with an \code{entrysubtype} of \code{yearbook}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3\textdagger>
+{dahlhaus1971mmf}
+Dahlhaus, C. (1971), \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emph{Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz, 1970} (Berlin), 21–33.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inreference{dahlhaus1971mmf,
+  author = {Carl Dahlhaus},
+  title = {Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts},
+  booktitle = {Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz,
+    1970},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  date = {1971},
+  pages = {21-33}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
+{gill1987intro}
+Gill, R. (1987), introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (Oxford; repr.\@ 2001).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppbook{gill1987intro,
+  author = {Roma Gill},
+  title = {introduction},
+  booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
+  volume = {1},
+  origlocation = {Oxford},
+  origdate = {1987},
+  edition = {reprint},
+  date = {2001}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
+\chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
+
+\section{Single volume proceedings}
+
+The \code{proceedings} entry type is intended for a set of conference papers that have been collected together into a single volume.
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.12\textdagger>
+{icp1975pic}
+\emph{Proceedings of the XIV International Congress of Papyrologists: Oxford, 24--31 July 1974} (1975) (London).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{icp1975pic,
+  title = {Proceedings of the {XIV} {International} {Congress} of {Papyrologists}},
+  subtitle = {{Oxford}, 24--31 {July} 1974},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1975}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{The \code{organization} is automatically converted into an \code{author}.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[1.52-3]{iau1922tia}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.13\textdagger>
+{iau1922tia}
+International Astronomical Union (1922), \emph{Transactions of the International Astronomical Union, Rome}, 12--20 May 1922 (London: Imperial College Bookstall).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{iau1922tia,
+  organization = {{International Astronomical Union}},
+  title = {Transactions of the {International} {Astronomical} {Union}, {Rome}},
+  eventdate = {1922-05-12/1922-05-20},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Imperial College Bookstall},
+  date = {1922}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Sometimes the title of the proceedings does not relate to the conference; in which case the following form might be used:
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ecdl2009}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{ecdl2009,
+  editor = {Maristella Agosti and José Borbinha and Sarantos Kapidakis and Christos
+    Papatheodorou and Giannis Tsakonas},
+  title = {Research and Advanced Technology for Digital Libraries},
+  eventtitle = {13th European Conference, ECDL 2009},
+  venue = {Corfu, Greece},
+  eventdate = {2009-09-27/2009-10-02},
+  series = {Lecture Notes in Computer Science},
+  number = {5714},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  publisher = {Springer},
+  date = {2009}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Multi-volume proceedings}
+
+\textsf{Biblatex} provides \code{mvproceedings} for multi-volume proceedings.
+The examples here are a combination of Oxford style for proceedings and multi-volume books.
+
+\subsection{All volumes}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{iced2009}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvproceedings{iced2009,
+  title = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)},
+  volumes = {10},
+  editor = {Margareta Norell Bergendahl and Martin Grimheden and Larry Leifer},
+  venue = {Stanford, CA},
+  eventdate = {2009-08-24/2009-08-27},
+  location = {Glasgow},
+  publisher = {Design Society},
+  date = {2009},
+  isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{One volume}
+
+\spec{\emph{VolTitle} (Year), VolNo \lit{of} \emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{iced2009dik}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvproceedings{iced2009dik,
+  maintitle = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)},
+  title = {Design Information and Knowledge},
+  volume = {8},
+  editor = {Margareta Norell Bergendahl and Martin Grimheden and Larry Leifer},
+  venue = {Stanford, CA},
+  eventdate = {2009-08-24/2009-08-27},
+  location = {Glasgow},
+  publisher = {Design Society},
+  date = {2009},
+  isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Published conference paper}
+
+The \code{inproceedings} entry type is intended for a conference paper published as part of a proceedings volume. For papers that have not been collected into a proceedings volume, or presentation slide sets, use the \code{unpublished} entry type instead (see below).
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{tonkin.strelnikov2009iem}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inproceedings{tonkin.strelnikov2009iem,
+  author = {Emma Tonkin and Alexey Strelnikov},
+  title = {Information Environment Metadata Schema Registry},
+  editor = {Maristella Agosti and José Borbinha and Sarantos Kapidakis and Christos Papatheodorou and Giannis Tsakonas},
+  booktitle = {Research and Advanced Technology for Digital Libraries},
+  eventtitle = {13th European Conference, ECDL 2009},
+  venue = {Corfu, Greece},
+  eventdate = {2009-09-27/2009-10-02},
+  series = {Lecture Notes in Computer Science},
+  number = {5714},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  publisher = {Springer},
+  date = {2009},
+  pages = {487-488},
+  isbn = {978-3-642-04345-1},
+  issn = {0302-9743}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher), VolNo. Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ding.etal2009sfc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inproceedings{ding.etal2009sfc,
+  author = {Lian Ding and Alex Ball and Manjula Patel and Jason Matthews and Glen Mullineux},
+  title = {Strategies for the Collaborative Use of CAD Product Models},
+  maintitle = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)},
+  booktitle = {Design Information and Knowledge},
+  volume = {8},
+  editor = {Margareta Norell Bergendahl and Martin Grimheden and Larry Leifer},
+  venue = {Stanford, CA},
+  eventdate = {2009-08-24/2009-08-27},
+  location = {Glasgow},
+  publisher = {Design Society},
+  date = {2009},
+  pages = {123-134},
+  isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4},
+  url = {http://opus.bath.ac.uk/14285}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Published orations, addresses, lectures, and speeches}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type, Venue, Date (Location: Publisher).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.6\textdagger>
+{gombrich1957as}
+Gombrich, E. H. (1957), \emph{Art and Scholarship}, Inaugural Lecture, University College London, 14 Feb. 1957 (London: H. K. Lewis).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{gombrich1957as,
+  author = {E. H. Gombrich},
+  title = {Art and Scholarship},
+  eventtitle = {Inaugural Lecture},
+  venue = {University College London},
+  eventdate = {1957-02-14},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {H. K. Lewis},
+  date = {1957}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the \texttt{eventtitle} field to indicate the type of the oration.}
+
+\section{Unpublished conference paper}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{paper given at the} ConfTitle, Venue, EventDate.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{mason.etal1984nns}
+Mason, J. B., Habicht, J. P., and Tabatabai, H. (1984), \enquote{Notes on Nutritional Surveillance}, paper delivered to the WHO conference.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@unpublished{mason.etal1984nns,
+  author = {J. B. Mason, and J. P. Habicht and H. Tabatabai},
+  date = {1984},
+  title = {Notes on Nutritional Surveillance},
+  howpublished = {paper delivered to the WHO conference}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Unpublished orations, addresses, lectures, and speeches}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Description.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{pritchard.pritchard1990ard}
+Pritchard, E., and Pritchard, J. (1990), \enquote{A Reply to Drèze}, unpub.\ paper.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@unpublished{pritchard.pritchard1990ard,
+  author = {E. Pritchard and J. Pritchard},
+  date = {1990},
+  title = {A Reply to Drèze},
+  howpublished = {unpub.\ paper}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\chapter{Grey literature}\label{sec:report}
+\chapterprecis{booklet, manual, patent, report, thesis, standard}
+
+\section{One-off reports}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Institution).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.13\textdagger>
+{botswana1980hdr}
+Government of Botswana (1980), \emph{A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana} (Gabarone: Ministry of Local Government and Lands).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{botswana1980hdr,
+  author = {{Government of Botswana}},
+  title = {A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana},
+  location = {Gabarone},
+  institution = {Ministry of Local Government and Lands},
+  date = {1980}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If the report does not specify an author, give the publishing institution in the \texttt{author} field.
+  Some examples in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} repeat the institution in the publisher slot
+  (i.e.\@ the \texttt{institution} field) and some do not.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.9.1>
+{who1986nde}
+WHO (World Health Organization) (1986), \emph{Nutrition and Development in East Africa} (Geneva: WHO)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{who1986nde,
+  author = {{World Health Organization}},
+  shortauthor = {WHO},
+  title = {Nutrition and Development in {East Africa}},
+  date = {1986},
+  location = {Geneva},
+  institution = {WHO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2>
+{cnnr2008tut}
+CNNR/GMH (Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria Historica) (2008), \emph{Trujilla: Una Tragedia que no Cesa [Trujilla: A Tragedy Without End]}, (Bogotá, Columbia: CNRR).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{cnnr2008tut,
+  shortauthor = {CNNR/GMH},
+  author = {{Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria Historica}},
+  date = {2008},
+  title = {Trujilla},
+  subtitle = {Una Tragedia que no Cesa},
+  titleaddon = {\printtext[title]{{Trujilla:} {A} Tragedy Without End}},
+  location = {Bogotá, Columbia},
+  institution = {CNRR}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Reports with a type or series}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{opcs1979amt}
+Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables: The Registrar-General's Decennial Supplement for England and Wales 1969–1973}, Series DS, No.~3 (London)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{opcs1979amt,
+  author = {{Office of Population Censuses and Surveys}},
+  date = {1979},
+  title = {Area Mortality Tables},
+  subtitle = {The Registrar-General's Decennial Supplement for England and Wales 1969–1973},
+  series = {Series DS},
+  number = {3},
+  location = {London}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
+{opcs1979pnc}
+Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{opcs1979pnc,
+  author = {{Office of Population Censuses and Surveys}},
+  date = {1979},
+  title = {Projections of the {New Commonwealth} and {Pakistani} Population},
+  type = {OPCS Monitor},
+  number = {PP2 79/1},
+  location = {London}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If the name of the series consists of the institution name and a type, it may make more sense to give the institution name in \code{series} rather than \code{institution}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}(hacked)<NHR \S17.3.2*>
+{rosenblatt.etal1988cap}
+Rosenblatt, J., et al. (1988), \emph{The Common Agricultural Policy of the European Community}, International Monetary Fund, occasional paper 62 (Nov.)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{rosenblatt.etal1988cap,
+  author = {Julius Rosenblatt and others},
+  title = {The {Common Agricultural Policy} of the {European Community}},
+  date = {1988-11},
+  series = {International Monetary Fund},
+  type = {occasional paper},
+  number = {62}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Theses}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.5.1\textdagger>
+{blackburn1970tlp}
+Blackburn, B. J. (1970), \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chicago).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@thesis{blackburn1970tlp,
+  author = {Bonnie J. Blackburn},
+  title = {The Lupus Problem},
+  type = {Ph.D. diss.},
+  institution = {University of Chicago},
+  date = {1970}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).}
+
+\chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
+\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+
+There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
+
+\section{Audio recordings}
+
+The basic structure of audio recording entries is as follows:
+
+\spec{Composer (RecordingYear), \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].}
+
+If the composer's name is not of interest, it may be omitted or replaced by the artist's name.
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} to specify the date of recording. If you want it to be introduced by something other than the localized string \enquote{recorded}, use the (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} field%
+.}
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording company:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+  a simple label name – e.g.\@ \enquote{Columbia}, \enquote{Hyperion}, \enquote{Archiv} – followed immediately by the type or number
+\item
+  a label name separated from the number by a comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Valois,}
+  \enquote{EMI Electrola,} \enquote{EMI Blues Series,}
+\item
+  a compiling organization, semicolon, publishing company, no comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Smithsonian Institution; Columbia}
+\item
+  a publishing company, colon, label name, comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Decca Record Company, Ltd.: Éditions de l'Oiseau-lyre,}
+\item
+  a publishing company, comma, location, comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Christophorus-Verlag Herder, Freiburg im Breisgau,}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to.
+
+\tip{To get the normal format, put the label name in \code{publisher}, the type of release (e.g.\@ compact disc, audio cassette) in \code{type}, and the catalogue number in \code{number}. In the examples from \emph{New Hart's Rules}, the type is uniformly omitted.}
+
+\tip{To put a comma between the label and the type\slash number, put the label name in \code{series} instead.}
+
+\tip{If you provide both a \code{publisher} and a \code{series}, they will be separated by \cs{recordseriespunct}, which is initially set to \cs{addcomma}\cs{space}. You could set it to \cs{addcolon}\cs{space} instead to match the example.}
+
+\tip{If the compiling organization is distinct from the publisher, put the former in \code{origpublisher}; it will be separated from the publisher by a semicolon.}
+
+\tip{Contrary to the OGS example, but in common with other entry types, the location if provided will be printed before the publisher, separated from it by a colon. (This is why a comma is the default for \cs{recordseriespunct}.) In the absence of a publisher it will be followed by a comma.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger>
+{carter1991fsq}
+Carter, E. (1991), \emph{The Four String Quartets}, Juilliard String Quartet (Sony S2K 47229).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{carter1991fsq,
+  author = {Elliott Carter},
+  title = {The Four String Quartets},
+  editor = {{Juilliard String Quartet}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  publisher = {Sony},
+  number = {S2K 47229},
+  date = {1991}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger>
+{hillier1989p}
+Hillier, P. (1989), \emph{Proensa} (ECM Records compact disc ECM 1368).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{hillier1989p,
+  author = {Paul Hillier},
+  title = {Proensa},
+  publisher = {ECM Records},
+  type = {compact disc},
+  number = {ECM 1368},
+  date = {1989}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger>
+{couperin1970pdc}
+Couperin, F. (1970), \emph{Pièces de clavecin: Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième ordres}, H. Dreyfus (Valois, MB 797).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{couperin1970pdc,
+  author = {Francois Couperin},
+  title = {Pièces de clavecin},
+  subtitle = {Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième
+    ordres},
+  editor = {Huguette Dreyfus},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  series = {Valois},
+  number = {MB 797},
+  date = {1970}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger>
+{pageNDmn}
+\emph{The Mirror of Narcissus: Songs by Guillaume de Machaut} (n.d.), Gothic Voices, dir. C. Page (Hyperion compact disc CDA 66087).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{pageNDmn,
+  title = {The Mirror of Narcissus},
+  subtitle = {Songs by Guillaume do Machaut},
+  editor = {{Gothic Voices}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Christopher Page},
+  editoratype = {director},
+  publisher = {Hyperion},
+  type = {compact disc},
+  number = {CDA 66087}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{To describe the medium in a separate note, use the \texttt{howpublished} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2\textdagger>
+{hopkinsNDcar}
+Lightnin' Hopkins (n.d.), \emph{The Complete Aladdin Recordings} (EMI Blues Series, CDP-7-96843-2) [2-vol.\@ CD set].
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{hopkinsNDcar,
+  author = {{Lightnin’ Hopkins}},
+  title = {The Complete Aladdin Recordings},
+  series = {EMI Blues Series},
+  number = {CDP-7-96843-2},
+  howpublished = {2-vol.\@ CD set}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{To describe the medium as part of the publication statement, use the \texttt{type} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger>
+{lewis1981lww}
+Lewis, C. S. (1981), \emph{The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe}, read by Sir M. Hordern (2 audio cassettes, TO1611).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{lewis1981lww,
+  author = {C. S. Lewis},
+  title = {The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe},
+  editor = {title=Sir, given=Michael, family=Hordern},
+  editortype = {reader},
+  type = {2 audio cassettes},
+  number = {TO1611},
+  date = {1981}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Combination releases}
+
+Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving it an overall title.
+
+\tip{Put the subsequent composer\slash title combinations in new entries, and relate them with a \code{relatedtype} of \code{includes}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger>
+{dutilleux1987as}
+Dutilleux, H. (1987), \emph{L'Arbre des songes}, and Maxwell Davies, P., \emph{Concerto for Violin and Orchestra}, Royal Philharmonic Orchestra, cond. A. Previn, violin I. Stern (CBS MK 42449).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{dutilleux1987as,
+  author = {Henri Dutilleux},
+  title = {L'Arbre des songes},
+  related = {maxwelldavies1987},
+  relatedtype = {includes},
+  editor = {{Royal Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {André Previn},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  editorb = {Isaac Stern},
+  editorbtype = {violin},
+  publisher = {CBS},
+  number = {MK 42449},
+  date = {1987}}
+@audio{maxwelldavies1987,
+  author = {Maxwell Davies, Peter},
+  title = {Concerto for Violin and Orchestra},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\hack{Only the primary work will show up in citations; the subsequent ones will not.
+  If this is not what you want, you will need to use \code{shortauthor}\slash\code{shorttitle} or \code{shorthand}, or build up the citation manually with \cs{citeauthor} and the like.}
+
+\info{Depending on the thrust of your document, you could remove the complication by shifting the composers into the title and putting the performers in the author position.}
+
+\info{If you are only interested in one of the works in the release, you might be better off using the \code{inaudio} entry type instead (see below).}
+
+\subsection{Tracks from an album}
+
+\tip{Use the non-standard entry types \code{inaudio} or \code{inmusic} to reference a single work within an album. Use \code{booktitle} (somewhat loosely) for the album title.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger>
+{davis1997sw}
+Davis, M. et al. (1959), \enquote{So What}, in \emph{Kind of Blue} (Columbia CK 64935, 1997) [CD].
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inaudio{davis1997sw,
+  author = {Miles Davis and others},
+  title = {So What},
+  booktitle = {Kind of Blue},
+  origdate = {1959},
+  origdatetype = {rec\adddot},
+  publisher = {Columbia},
+  number = {CK 64935},
+  date = {1997},
+  howpublished = {CD}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{Note the use of \code{origdate} for the date of recording in this example.}
+
+\section{Video recordings}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year) (Publisher, Number).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
+{bbc1987ava}
+\emph{The Ashes: Victory in Australia} (1987) (BBCV 4040).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{bbc1987ava,
+  title = {The {Ashes}},
+  subtitle = {Victory in {Australia}},
+  publisher = {BBCV},
+  number = {4040},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle} \lit{series} (Publisher, Number).}
+
+\tip{For an episode in a series, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{episode} and put the series name in \code{maintitle}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
+{britt1986pho}
+\enquote{Percy and Harold and Other Stories} (1986), \emph{Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends} series (Britt Allcroft 5-014861-100224).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{britt1986pho,
+  entrysubtype = {episode},
+  title = {{Percy} and {Harold} and Other Stories},
+  maintitle = {Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends \textup{series}},
+  publisher = {Britt Allcroft},
+  number = {5-014861-100224},
+  date = {1986}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Director (Year) (\lit{dir.}), \emph{Title} (Publisher, Number).}
+
+\tip{Use the \texttt{author} field to place a credit at the head of the reference.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
+{chaplin1936mt}
+Chaplin, C. (1936) (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@movie{chaplin1936mt,
+  author = {Charles Chaplin},
+  authortype = {director},
+  title = {Modern Times},
+  publisher = {United Artists},
+  date = {1936}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{dir.} Director (Publisher, Number).}
+
+\tip{Use the \texttt{editor} field to place a credit after the title.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
+{reiner1983tst}
+\emph{This is Spinal Tap: A Rockumentary by Marti Di Bergi} (1983), dir.\ R. Reiner (Embassy Pictures).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@movie{reiner1983tst,
+  title = {This is {Spinal} {Tap}},
+  subtitle = {A Rockumentary by {Marti} {Di} {Bergi}},
+  editor = {Rob Reiner},
+  editortype = {director},
+  publisher = {Embassy Pictures},
+  date = {1983}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year) (Publisher, Number), Credit.}
+
+\tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
+  If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
+  You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
+{kaurismaki1989lcg}
+\emph{Leningrad Cowboys Go America} (1989) (Villealfa Filmproductions), dir.\@ and screenplay by A. Kaurismäki, story by S. Järvenpää, A. Kaurismäki, M. Valtonen.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@movie{kaurismaki1989lcg,
+  title = {Leningrad Cowboys Go America},
+  publisher = {Villealfa Filmproductions},
+  date = {1989},
+  editortype = {dir.\ and screenplay by},
+  editor = {Aki Kaurismäki},
+  editoratype = {story by},
+  editora = {Sakke Järvenpää and Aki Kaurismäki and Mato Valtonen},
+  options = {endeditor}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{For an online video, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{clip}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{bbc2013iim}
+BBC News (2013), \enquote{Inside India's Mars Mission HQ} [video] (5 Nov.), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{bbc2013iim,
+  entrysubtype = {clip},
+  author = {{BBC News}},
+  title = {Inside India's Mars Mission HQ},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{rubinstein1956rpc}
+Rubinstein, A. (1956), \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)} [video], YouTube (recorded 9 Jan., uploaded 8 Nov. 2011), \url{http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{rubinstein1956rpc,
+  entrysubtype = {clip},
+  author = {Arthur Rubinstein},
+  title = {Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)},
+  organization = {YouTube},
+  origdate = {1956-01-09},
+  date = {2011-11-08},
+  datetype = {uploaded},
+  url = {http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use \texttt{origdate} and, if necessary, the (non-standard) \texttt{origdatetype} field to specify the date of recording or original broadcast. Use the (non-standard) \texttt{datetype} field to clarify the event represented by the publication date.}
+
+\section{Broadcasts}\label{sec:broadcasts}
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} sides with the latter.
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), Channel (Location, Day Month, Time).}
+
+\tip{Put the channel in the \code{organization} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.3*\textdagger>
+{canal2001ch}
+\emph{Un Cœur in Hiver} (2001), Canal+ (Paris, 15 May, 11.40 p.m.).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{canal2001ch,
+  title = {Un Cœur in Hiver},
+  organization = {Canal+},
+  location = {Paris},
+  date = {2001-05-15T23:40:00+02:00}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.}
+
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{berger1972ws}
+Berger, J. (1972), Episode 1, \emph{Ways of Seeing}, BBC, \url{https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{berger1972ws,
+  entrysubtype = {episode},
+  author = {John Berger},
+  title = {Episode 1},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  maintitle = {Ways of Seeing},
+  organization = {BBC},
+  date = {1972},
+  url = {https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Podcasts, video podcasts and webcasts}
+
+\tip{Set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{podcast} for a podcast.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.3\textdagger>
+{weldon2010did}
+Weldon, F. (2010), interview with Kirsty Young, \emph{Desert Island Discs Archive} [podcast], BBC Radio 4 (9 May), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{weldon2010did,
+  entrysubtype = {podcast},
+  author = {Fay Weldon},
+  descriptor = {interview with {Kirsty Young}},
+  maintitle = {Desert Island Discs Archive},
+  organization = {BBC Radio 4},
+  date = {2010-05-09},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
+{perry2013ifm}
+Perry, G. (2013), \enquote{I Found Myself in the Art World} [podcast], Reith Lecture, BBC Radio 4 (5 Nov.), \url{http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{perry2013ifm,
+  entrysubtype = {podcast},
+  author = {Grayson Perry},
+  title = {I Found Myself in the Art World},
+  note = {Reith Lecture},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  organization = {BBC Radio 4},
+  url = {http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{I am not sure why \emph{New Hart's Rules} places the channel after the date in the above case; it is probably a mistake or an odd variation, so I have adjusted it for consistency.}
+
+\tip{As for other online videos, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{clip} for a video podcast.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
+{nicholson2011qsm}
+Nicholson, C. (2011), \enquote{A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style} [video], \emph{Scientific American} (17 Dec.), \url{http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17}, accessed 4 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{nicholson2011qsm,
+  entrysubtype = {clip},
+  author = {Christie Nicholson},
+  title = {A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style},
+  organization = {\emph{Scientific American}},
+  date = {2011-12-17},
+  url = {http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17},
+  urldate = {2013-11-04}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{The above is actually an episode of the audio podcast \emph{60-Second Mind} (which would be the \code{maintitle}).
+  \emph{Scientific American} is in this instance the \code{organization} that is hosting it, but because it is also the name of a journal, it has been manually formatted to match.}
+
+\tip{Perhaps a better way of achieiving consistency in this case would be to treat it like an article, and clarify the medium (i.e.\@ video, erroneously) using the \texttt{titleaddon} field.}
+
+\tip{Set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{webcast} for a webcast.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
+{yousafzai2013mwa}
+Yousafzai, M. (2013), \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013} [webcast], UN Web TV, (12 July), \url{http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala}, accessed 15 Feb. 2015.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{yousafzai2013mwa,
+  entrysubtype = {webcast},
+  author = {Malala Yousafzai},
+  title = {Making a Wish for Action on Global Education},
+  subtitle = {Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013},
+  organization = {UN Web TV},
+  date = {2013-07-12},
+  url = {http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala},
+  urldate = {2015-02-15}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Images}
+
+\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{clarkeNDeci}
+Clarke, M. (n.d.), \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery, \url{http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@image{clarkeNDeci,
+  author = {M. Clarke},
+  title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
+  titleaddon = {poster},
+  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{ibwNDcgs}
+\enquote{Christ the Good Shepherd} (n.d.), stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys, Imaging the Bible in Wales Database, \url{http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884}, accessed 10 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@image{ibwNDcgs,
+  title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
+  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
+  url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
+  urldate = {2013-11-10}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
+\chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
+
+In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+
+\section{Website articles}
+
+Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, which is fine for whole websites but not if you want to cite one page or article within a website.
+
+\tip{If the piece is unsigned, put the site name in the \code{author} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{bbc2013cgh}
+BBC News (2013), \enquote{Colchester General Hospital: Police Probe Cancer Treatment} (5 Nov.), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{bbc2013cgh,
+  author = {{BBC News}},
+  title = {Colchester General Hospital},
+  subtitle = {Police Probe Cancer Treatment},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If the piece is signed, put the site name in the \code{organization} field.
+  The rationale is that \textsf{biblatex} uses this for the organization hosting the site,
+  and it can get a bit blurry between that and the name of the site itself.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{hooper2013lfs}
+Hooper, R. (2013), \enquote{Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme}, BBC News Magazine (14 Nov.) \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423}, accessed 14 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{hooper2013lfs,
+  author = {Richard Hooper},
+  title = {Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme},
+  organization = {BBC News Magazine},
+  date = {2013-11-14},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423},
+  urldate = {2013-11-14}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{tan2013wdt}
+Tan, S.-L. (2013), \enquote{Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?} [including video], OUPblog (5 Nov.), \url{http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{tan2013wdt,
+  author = {Siu-Lan Tan},
+  title = {Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?},
+  titleaddon = {including video},
+  organization = {OUPblog},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  url = {http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{allaby2013fll}
+Allaby, M. (2013), \enquote{Feathers and Lava Lamps}, Oxford Reference, \url{http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{allaby2013fll,
+  author = {Michael Allaby},
+  title = {Feathers and Lava Lamps},
+  organization = {Oxford Reference},
+  date = {2013},
+  url = {http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If the site looks more like a traditional journal (e.g.\@ with an ISSN), use the \code{article} entry type instead of \code{online}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{mcewen2013tte}
+McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}}, \emph{The Spectator} (20 May), \url{http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{mcewen2013tte,
+  author = {Stephen McEwen},
+  title = {Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}},
+  journaltitle = {The Spectator},
+  date = {2013-05-20},
+  options = {varissuedate=false},
+  url = {http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Online reference article}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{eb2013gp}
+\enquote{Gunpowder Plot} (n.d.), \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, \url{http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{eb2013gp,
+  title = {Gunpowder Plot},
+  maintitle = {Encyclopaedia Britannica},
+  url = {http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
+  It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
+  it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
+  it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
+  or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
+
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{wp2013oup}
+\enquote{Oxford University Press} (2013), Wikipedia (last modified 5 Nov.), \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{wp2013oup,
+  title = {Oxford University Press},
+  organization = {Wikipedia},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  datetype = {modified},
+  url = {http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the (non-standard) \texttt{datetype} field to clarify the event represented by the main date.}
+
+\section{Social media}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{obama2013tvd}
+Obama, B. (2013), \enquote{Tomorrow is Veterans Day} [Facebook post] (10 Nov.), \url{https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{obama2013tvd,
+  entrysubtype = {facebook},
+  author = {Barack Obama},
+  title = {Tomorrow is Veterans Day},
+  date = {2013-11-10},
+  url = {https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/},
+  urldate = {2013-11-13}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{harvey2013tfm}
+Harvey, J. (2013), \enquote{\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28} [Facebook post] (13 Nov.), \url{https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{harvey2013tfm,
+  entrysubtype = {facebook},
+  author = {John Harvey},
+  title = {\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28},
+  date = {2013-11-13},
+  url = {https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre},
+  urldate = {2013-11-13}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
+{globe2013otd}
+Shakespeare's Globe (2013), \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I} [Twitter post] (5.48~a.m., 1~Nov.), \url{https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{globe2013otd,
+  entrysubtype = {tweet},
+  author = {{Shakespeare's Globe}},
+  title = {On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I},
+  date = {2013-11-01T05:48:00},
+  options = {timefirst},
+  url = {https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{oup2015tweet}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{oup2015tweet,
+  author = {{Oxford University Press}},
+  shortauthor = {OUP},
+  descriptor = {Twitter post},
+  date = {2015-11-16T01:07:00},
+  url = {https://twitter.com/OxUniPress/status/666180787251843072},
+  urldate = {2015-12-25}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Software}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{simoga1.1d6}
+Simoga (n.d.), \emph{Device 6} (version 1.1) [mobile application for iPhone and iPad], downloaded 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@software{simoga1.1d6,
+  author = {Simoga},
+  title = {Device 6},
+  version = {1.1},
+  titleaddon = {mobile application for iPhone and iPad},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{eliot1.1.1twl}
+Eliot, T. S. (2013), \emph{The Waste Land} (version 1.1.1) [mobile application for iPad] (London: Touch Press), downloaded 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@software{eliot1.1.1twl,
+  author = {T. S. Eliot},
+  title = {The Waste Land},
+  version = {1.1.1},
+  titleaddon = {mobile application for iPad},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Touch Press},
+  date = {2013},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Database}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
+{un2011wpp}
+United Nations (2011), \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-ROM] (New York: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@dataset{un2011wpp,
+  author = {{United Nations}},
+  title = {World Population Prospects},
+  subtitle = {The 2010 Revision},
+  titleaddon = {CD-ROM},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {{United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division}},
+  date = {2011}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Legal references}\label{sec:legal}
+\chapterprecis{commentary, jurisdiction, legal, legislation}
+
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text.
+For a more thorough and robust treatment, intended for a specialist readership, I recommend you use the \href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/oscola}{\textsf{oscola}} style instead.
+
+Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes.
+
+
+\section{Cases}
+
+\subsection{Reported cases}
+
+Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
+
+\tip{Use the \code{keyword} field to specify the jurisdiction. The following are recognized:
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\val{gb}
+    United Kingdom
+  \item\val{en}:
+    England (default)
+  \item\val{cy}:
+    Wales
+  \item\val{sc}:
+    Scotland
+  \item\val{ni}:
+    Northern Ireland
+  \item\val{eu}:
+    European Union (including the EEC, EC, ECSC and EURATOM)
+  \item\val{echr}:
+    Organs of the Council of Europe dealing with the European Convention on Human Rights
+  \item\val{int}:
+    (Public) international law cases and materials
+  \item\val{us}:
+    United States of America
+  \item\val{ca}:
+    Canada
+  \item\val{aus}:
+    Australia
+  \item\val{nz}:
+    New Zealand
+  \end{itemize}
+}
+
+\tip{Scottish cases heard at the House of Lords or the Supreme Court should technically be given the keyword \val{gb}, therefore you can also identify them with the \key{scottish-style} option.}
+
+\tip{Use either the (non-standard) \code{reporter} or \code{journaltitle} field for the (abbreviated) name of the report series. Use the \code{series} field for a numeric sub-series.}
+
+\tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
+  \val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
+  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+  There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
+}
+
+\tip{If you want to include a parallel citation, you can use the non-standard \code{pardate}, \code{parreporter}, \code{parseries}, \code{parvolume}, and \code{parpages} fields.}
+
+\tip{If you need to, use either the (non-standard) \code{court} or \code{institution} field for the court that decided the case.}
+
+\tip{Use the \code{location} field for the location of the court in American, Australian or Canadian cases.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[78-79]{ridge1964}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1\textdagger>
+{ridge1964}
+\emph{Ridge v Baldwin} [1964] AC 40
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{ridge1964,
+  title = {Ridge v. Baldwin},
+  keywords = {gb},
+  date = {1964},
+  journaltitle = {A.C.},
+  pages = {40}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the \key{year-essential} Boolean entry option to specify whether the year is essential for locating the report, in cases where automatic detection (based on the presence or otherwise of a volume number) fails.
+  There is a similar \key{paryear-essential} option for the parallel year.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{lambert2001}
+\emph{R v Lambert} [2001] 2 WLR 211 (QBD)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{lambert2001,
+  title = {R v Lambert},
+  keywords = {gb},
+  date = {2001},
+  volume = {2},
+  journaltitle = {WLR},
+  pages = {211},
+  institution = {QBD},
+  options = {year-essential=true}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{badische1897}
+\emph{Badische v Soda-Fabrics} (1897) 14 RPC 919 (HL)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{badische1897,
+  title = {Badische v. Soda-Fabrics},
+  date = {1897},
+  journaltitle = {RPC},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {919},
+  institution = {HL}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the (non-standard) \code{neutralcite} or \code{number} field for the neutral citation or case number.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{rvg2004}
+\emph{R v G} [2003] UKHL 50, [2004] 1 AC 1034
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{rvg2004,
+  title = {R. v. G.},
+  number = {[2003] UKHL 50},
+  date = {2004},
+  journaltitle = {A.C.},
+  volume = {1},
+  pages = {1034},
+  options = {year-essential},
+  pagination = {[]}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[13]{rvg2004}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.3>
+{smith2001}
+\emph{Smith v Jones} [2001] (1948) 2 All ER 431
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{smith2001,
+  title = {Smith v Jones},
+  date = {2001},
+  origdate = {1948},
+  journaltitle = {All ER},
+  volume = {2},
+  pages = {431},
+  options = {year-essential}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}.
+
+\tip{To print the court of decision plain, you can use the \key{court-plain} option. You can set this globally at the style level or on a per-entry basis.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.3>
+{bowman1978}
+\emph{Bowman v Fussy} [1978] RPC 545, HL
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{bowman1978,
+  title = {Bowman v Fussy},
+  keywords = {gb},
+  date = {1978},
+  journaltitle = {RPC},
+  pages = {545},
+  institution = {HL},
+  options = {court-plain}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{hughes1907}
+\emph{Hughes v Stewart}, 1907 SC 791
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{hughes1907,
+  title = {Hughes v. Stewart},
+  date = {1907},
+  reporter = {SC},
+  pages = {791},
+  keywords = {sc}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{corcoran1932}
+\emph{Corcoran v HM Advocate}, 1932 JC 42
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{corcoran1932,
+  title = {Corcoran v. H.M. Advocate},
+  date = {1932},
+  reporter = {JC},
+  pages = {42},
+  keywords = {sc}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{michael1976}
+\emph{Michael v Johnson}, 426 US 346 (1976)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{michael1976,
+  title = {Michael v. Johnson},
+  volume = {426},
+  reporter = {U.S.},
+  pages = {346},
+  date = {1976},
+  keywords = {us}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Unreported cases}
+
+\tip{For cases reported in newspapers, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{newspaper}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.2*>
+{powick1993}
+\emph{Powick v Malvern Wells Water Co}, The Times, 28 Sept.\@ 1993
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{powick1993,
+  entrysubtype = {newspaper},
+  title = {Powick v. Malvern Wells Water Co},
+  date = {1993-09-28},
+  journaltitle = {The Times}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.2*>
+{marianishi1965}
+\emph{R v Marianishi, ex p London Borough of Camden} (CA, 13 Apr.\@ 1965)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{marianishi1965,
+  title = {R v Marianishi, ex p London Borough of Camden},
+  date = {1965-04-13},
+  institution = {C.A.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{European cases}
+
+\tip{You can record the European Case Law Identifier for a case using the \code{ecli} field.
+  The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
+
+\tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
+  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S13.4.4>
+{C118/07}
+Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] ECR I–10889
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{C118/07,
+  keywords = {eu},
+  title = {Commission of the European Communities v. Finland},
+  sorttitle = {Case C0118/0007},
+  number = {C\textendash 118/07},
+  journaltitle = {ECR},
+  volume = {I},
+  pages = {10889},
+  date = {2002}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+
+\tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S13.2.6>
+{alcatel}
+\emph{Alcatel/Telettra} (Case IV/M042) [1991] OJ L122/48, [1991] 4 CLMR 391
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{alcatel,
+  keywords = {eu},
+  title = {Alcatel/Telettra},
+  parvolume = {Case IV/M042},
+  institution = {commission},
+  date = {1991},
+  journaltitle = {OJ},
+  series = {L},
+  volume = {122},
+  pages = {48},
+  note = {[1991] 4 CLMR 391}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{For ECHR cases, put the application number in the \code{number} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.5>
+{young1982}
+\emph{Young, James and Webster v UK} (App no 7601/76) (1982) 4 EHRR 38
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{young1982,
+  title = {Young, James and Webster v. UK},
+  number = {7601/76},
+  reporter = {EHRR},
+  volume = {4},
+  date = {1982},
+  pages = {38},
+  keywords = {echr}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Special formatting is triggered if you specify \code{Series A} or \code{ECHR} as the \code{journaltitle} or \code{reporter}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.5>
+{plattform1988}
+\emph{Plattform \enquote{Artze für das Leben} v Austria} (App no 10126/82) (1988) Series A no 139
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{plattform1988,
+  title = {Plattform \enquote{Artze für das Leben} v. Austria},
+  number = {10126/82},
+  reporter = {Series A},
+  date = {1988},
+  pages = {139},
+  keywords = {echr}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.5>
+{osman1998}
+\emph{Osman v UK} (App no 23452/94) ECHR 1998–VIII 3124
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{osman1998,
+  title = {Osman v UK},
+  number = {23452/94},
+  reporter = {ECHR},
+  date = {1998},
+  volume = {8},
+  pages = {3124},
+  institution = {ECtHR},
+  keywords = {echr}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Legislation}
+
+Use the \code{legislation} entry type for citing Acts, Bills, Orders, Measures, and the like.
+
+\subsection{UK legislation}
+
+\tip{Specify an \code{entrysubtype} of \code{primary} for primary legislation.
+  This ensures only the title and year are printed.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S13.2.3>
+{fwa1891}
+Factory and Workshop Act 1891
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{fwa1891,
+  entrysubtype = {primary},
+  title = {Factory and Workshop Act},
+  shorttitle = {FWA 91},
+  date = {1891},
+  pagination = {section},
+  keywords = {en},
+  number = {54 \& 55 Vict, c. 75}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Specify an \code{entrysubtype} of \code{secondary} for secondary legislation.
+  The number is then printed as well.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.1>
+{lap1897}
+Local Authority Precepts Order 1897, SR~\&~O 1897/201
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{lap1897,
+  entrysubtype = {secondary},
+  title = {Local Authority Precepts Order},
+  date = {1897},
+  number = {SR~\&~O 1897\slash 201},
+  pagination = {rule}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.1>
+{ccsga1987}
+Community Charge Support Grant (Abolition) Order 1987, SI 1987/466
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{ccsga1987,
+  entrysubtype = {secondary},
+  title = {Community Charge Support Grant (Abolition) Order},
+  date = {1987},
+  number = {SI 1987\slash 466},
+  pagination = {regulation}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{European legislation}
+
+As with European cases, European legislation should be given the \val{eu} keyword.
+This is currently the only keyword that makes a difference to the formatting.
+
+According to both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules},
+you can provide an even sparser reference for primary European legislation.
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[\pno~3b]{ECT:Rome}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ECT:Rome}%
+EC Treaty
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{ECT:Rome,
+  entrysubtype = {eu-treaty},
+  title = {EC Treaty},
+  shorthandintro = {Treaty of Rome, as amended},
+  shorthand = {EC Treaty},
+  pagination = {article},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+If this seems scandalously short, you may prefer to provide a full reference (including the relevant entry in the OJ or OJ Spec Ed) for the bibliography and use, say, \cs{citetitle} for citations.
+
+Secondary legislation should always have a full reference.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.2>
+{EC:97/1}
+Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice [1997] OJ L234/3
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{EC:97/1,
+  title = {Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice},
+  date = {1997},
+  journaltitle = {OJ},
+  series = {L},
+  issue = {234},
+  pages = {3},
+  pagination = {article},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.2>
+{EEC:1017/68}
+Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport [1968] OJ Spec Ed 302
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{EEC:1017/68,
+  title = {Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport},
+  date = {1968},
+  journaltitle = {OJ Spec Ed},
+  pages = {302},
+  pagination = {article},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.2>
+{ECN:1986}
+Commission Notice on agreements of minor importance [1986] OJ C231/2, as amended [1994] OJ C368/20
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{ECN:1986,
+  title = {Commission Notice on agreements of minor importance},
+  date = {1986},
+  journaltitle = {OJ},
+  series = {C},
+  issue = {231},
+  pages = {2},
+  note = {as amended [1994] OJ C368/20},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Treaties}
+
+Treaties use the \code{legal} entry type, with \code{piltreaty} as the \code{entrysubtype}.
+
+\tip{Don't use the \code{date} field for treaties; instead, use the \code{execution} field to give a list of dates. Each date should be given in the form \meta{type}=\meta{year-month-day}, where \meta{type} is one of \key{opened}, \key{signed}, \key{adopted}, or \key{inforce}. The dates won't be sorted; they will be printed in the order given.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.6*>
+{refugees}
+Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees (adopted 28 July 1951, entered into force 22 Apr.\@ 1954) 189 UNTS 137
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legal{refugees,
+  entrysubtype = {piltreaty},
+  title = {Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees},
+  shorthand = {Refugee Convention},
+  execution = {adopted=1951-07-28 and inforce=1954-04-22},
+  pagination = {article},
+  volume = {189},
+  journaltitle = {UNTS},
+  pages = {137}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Hansard}
+
+References to Hansard use the \code{legal} entry type, with \code{parliamentary} as the \code{entrysubtype}.
+
+\tip{For debates since 1909, give \code{Hansard} as the \code{title} and put either \code{HC} or \code{HL} in the \code{type} field.}
+
+\tip{Put the column numbers in the \code{pages} field, and put \code{column} in the \code{bookpagination} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.7.3*>
+{hc357}
+Hansard, HC vol.\@ 357, cols.\@ 234–45 (13 Apr.\@ 1965)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legal{hc357,
+  entrysubtype = {parliamentary},
+  title = {Hansard},
+  type = {HC},
+  volume = {357},
+  pages = {234-245},
+  date = {1965-04-13},
+  bookpagination = {column}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{For debates before 1909, give \code{Parl. Deb.} as the \code{title}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.7.3*>
+{pd4/24}
+Parl.\@ Deb.\@ (series 4) vol.\@ 24, col.\@ 234 (24 Mar.\@ 1895)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legal{pd4/24,
+  entrysubtype = {parliamentary},
+  title = {Parl. Deb.},
+  series = {4},
+  volume = {24},
+  pages = {234},
+  date = {1895-03-24},
+  bookpagination = {column}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Legal reports}
+
+Reports of Parliamentary select committees and the Law Commission should be entered using the \code{report} entry type, with the \code{entrysubtype} set to \code{legal}.
+
+\tip{To print the identifying codes within the publication block, put them all in \code{number}; do not specify a \code{type} or \code{series}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.7.2\textdagger>
+{lc2009icl}
+Law Commission (2009), \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526) para 1.15
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{lc2009icl,
+  entrysubtype = {legal},
+  author = {{Law Commission}},
+  title = {Intoxication and Criminal Liability},
+  number = {Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526},
+  date = {2009},
+  pages = {1.15},
+  bookpagination = {paragraph}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Commentaries}
+
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries;
+it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
+
+\chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+
+\section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
+
+\subsection{Short poems}
+
+\tip{Use the \code{incollection} entry type for a poem in a collection.
+  If it appears in an article or a work that is itself in a collection,
+  use the \code{misc} entry type for the poem, with a relation of type \code{in} pointing to the containing work.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.8\textdagger>
+{auden1990era}
+Auden, W. H. (n.d.), \enquote{Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände} [\emph{sic}], in \enquote{The German Auden: Six Early Poems}, trans. D. Constantine, in K. Bucknell and N. Jenkins (eds.), \emph{W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}: Early Works, Friends, and Influences} (Auden Studies, 1; Oxford, 1990), 1--15 at 6.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@misc{auden1990era,
+  author = {W. H. Auden},
+  title = {Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände},
+  titleaddon = {\emph{sic}},
+  related = {constantine1990gas},
+  relatedtype = {in},
+  pages = {6}}
+@incollection{constantine1990gas,
+  title = {The {German} {Auden}},
+  subtitle = {Six Early Poems},
+  author = {David Constantine},
+  authortype = {translator},
+  options = {useauthor=false},
+  editor = {Katherine Bucknell and Nicholas Jenkins},
+  booktitle = {W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}},
+  booksubtitle = {Early Works, Friends, and Influences},
+  series = {Auden Studies},
+  number = {1},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1990},
+  pages = {1-15}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.8\textdagger>
+{blois1993qff}
+William of Blois (n.d.), \enquote{The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly} (\emph{Pulicis et musce iurgia}), trans. in Ziolkowski, J. M., \emph{Talking Animals: Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150} (Middle Ages Series, ed. E. Peters; Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1993), 274--8.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@misc{blois1993qff,
+  author = {{William of Blois}},
+  title = {The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly},
+  origtitle = {Pulicis et musce iurgia},
+  related = {ziolkowski1993tam},
+  relatedtype = {in},
+  relatedstring = {trans.\@ in},
+  pages = {274-278}}
+@book{ziolkowski1993tam,
+  author = {Jan M. Ziolkowski},
+  title = {Talking Animals},
+  subtitle = {Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150},
+  series = {Middle Ages Series},
+  serieseditor = {Edward Peters},
+  location = {Philadelphia},
+  publisher = {University of Pennsylvania Press},
+  date = {1993}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Long poems}
+
+If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted.
+
+\tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the poem is published on its own,
+  and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{poem} if the poem is published in an anthology.}
+
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+  \code{book}, \code{canto}, and \code{stanza} (\code{line} is already defined),
+  though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[\pno~ii, canto vi, stanza iii]{spenser1965fq}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.8*\textdagger>
+{spenser1965fq}%
+Spenser, E. (1590–6), \emph{The Faerie Queene} (Everyman's Library, 443–4; London: Dent, 1965–6).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{spenser1965fq,
+  author = {Edmund Spenser},
+  title = {The Faerie Queene},
+  shorttitle = {Faerie Queene},
+  series = {Everyman's Library},
+  number = {443–4},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Dent},
+  date = {1965/1966},
+  origdate = {1590/1596},
+  pagination = {book}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Plays}\label{sec:play}
+
+Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
+
+\tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the play is published on its own,
+  and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{play} if the play is published in an anthology.}
+
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+  \code{act} and \code{scene} (\code{line} is already defined),
+  though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
+
+\section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
+
+\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+
+With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
+
+\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will handle all this for you.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{author} and \code{date} as normal. Note that the \code{date} will not be printed if both the \code{author} and \code{title}\slash \code{descriptor} fields are left blank.}
+
+\tip{Put the library or archive where the manuscript is kept in the \code{library} field, and the city or place name in the \code{location} field. Note that the \code{library} field is required to switch on the special support for manuscripts.}
+
+\tip{Put the collection name in the \code{series} field and the shelfmark in the \code{number} field.}
+
+\tip{Put the page range studied (or some other subdivision) in the \code{pages} field. You can use \cs{recto} and \cs{verso} for the respective sides of a folio, and you can also specify a \code{pagetotal}.}
+
+\tip{You can use the \code{folio} key in the \code{pagination} and \code{bookpagination} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger>
+{smithMS23116}
+Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@unpublished{smithMS23116,
+  author = {Francis Smith},
+  descriptor = {travel diaries},
+  date = {1912/1917},
+  library = {British Library},
+  series = {Add. MS},
+  number = {23116}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model.
+
+\tip{You can use \code{author}, \code{title}\slash \code{note}\slash \code{descriptor} and \code{date} as described above. (This is a departure from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.)}
+
+\tip{Put the library or archive where the manuscript is kept in the \code{library} field, and the city or place name in the \code{location} field}
+
+\tip{Put the collection name in the \code{collection} field and the shelfmark in the \code{shelfmark} field.}
+
+\tip{If the date is vague (e.g. a century), you can put this in the \code{dating} field. Note that it will only be printed if the \code{date} is missing\slash not printed.}
+
+\tip{Put the page range studied (or some other subdivision) in the \code{pages} field. You can use \cs{recto} and \cs{verso} for the respective sides of a folio, and you can also specify a \code{pagetotal}.}
+
+\tip{You can specify the number of columns (either \code{1} or \code{2}) in the \code{columns} field.}
+
+\tip{You can specify the layer of a palimpsest in the \code{layer} field. Use \code{inf} for the inferior layer and \code{sup} for the superior layer.}
+
+\tip{You can specify the writing support material in the \code{support} field. Three special keys – \code{papyrus}, \code{paper}, and \code{pergament} – are recognized and (potentially) translated, but other values will be printed as-is.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
+{chaundlerMS288}
+Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{chaundlerMS288,
+  author = {Thomas Chaundler},
+  title = {Collocutiones},
+  library = {Balliol College},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  shelfmark = {MS288}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
+{exchequerE311}
+exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{exchequerE311,
+  descriptor = {exchequer accounts},
+  date = {1798-12},
+  library = {Cheshire Record Office},
+  shelfmark = {E311}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.3\textdagger>
+{blcBOX19d}
+Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{blcBOX19d,
+  title = {Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {1949-06-12},
+  library = {Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries},
+  shelfmark = {box 19/d}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.5\textdagger>
+{bodMSrawl-d520}
+Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{bodMSrawl-d520,
+  library = {Bodleian Library},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  collection = {MS Rawlinson D.},
+  shelfmark = {520},
+  pages = {7},
+  bookpagination = {folio}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{cantabAGM4429}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{cantabAGM4429,
+  library = {University Library},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  collection = {Add. Greek MS},
+  shelfmark = {4489},
+  support = {pergament},
+  dating = {8th--9th c.},
+  pagetotal = {16},
+  columns = {1},
+  pages = {11\recto-11\verso},
+  layer = {inf},
+  bookpagination = {folio}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
+\end{document}
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball
+%%
+%% End of file `oxalph-doc.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
index d37d96480b7..86fd07497e0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
index 08f7400c12c..c7b02ab8f4b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2017/05/14 v0.10}
+\def\Version{2017/11/18 v0.11}
 \ProvidesFile{oxnotes-doc.tex}
     [\Version\space Footnote-based biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnotes,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -139,7 +139,11 @@
 \usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
 \crefname{page}{page}{pages}
 
-\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1}{\textsf{#1}}}
+\NewDocumentCommand{\pkg}{om}{%
+  \IfNoValueTF{#1}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1-#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}%
+}
 \newcommand*{\lit}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
 \newcommand*{\code}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
 \newcommand*{\aside}[1]{\textcolor{violet}{[\textsc{tip:} #1]}}
@@ -308,7 +312,7 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
     separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
   \item\docValue{parens}
     sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
-    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
+    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
@@ -340,8 +344,8 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 \end{docKey}
 
 \begin{docKey}{usenametitles}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{true}}
-  Controls whether personal titles such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed.
-  (There is an example of how to supply titles in the \hyperref[ex:lewis1981lww]{Lewis reference} on \cpageref{ex:lewis1981lww}.)
+  Controls whether titular prefixes such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed.
+  (See \cref{sec:nametitles} for how to supply titles as part of a name.)
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
@@ -350,7 +354,7 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
-\textsf{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
 It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
 In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
 
@@ -414,7 +418,7 @@ Where a source is provided, it refers to a section from one of the reference wor
 \end{description}
 
 Where the source is starred (*), this indicates the example is not quite how it appears in the book,
-usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \textsf{oxref} default.
+usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} default.
 
 \section{Design philosophy}
 
@@ -423,7 +427,7 @@ amount not so much to a consistent style as a body of advice for creating one.
 Unlike the style manuals published by the American Psychological Association,
 the Modern Language Association, and the University of Chicago to name but three,
 the emphasis of the Oxford guide is to describe good practice rather than prescribe a particular style.
-This means that when it comes to \textsf{oxref}, there are decisions to be made
+This means that when it comes to \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, there are decisions to be made
 as to which variations to support by default, which to support as options,
 and which to ignore quietly.
 
@@ -436,13 +440,14 @@ and have more of an eye on machine processing of bibliographies.
 They do, however, introduce additional variations with less of a steer on what is preferred,
 and are considerably shorter with fewer examples.
 
-The approach of \textsf{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible,
+The approach of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible,
 but where variations are given without strong preference, or where guidance is lacking,
 to follow the preferences of the 2002 guide.
 Where the practices of the humanities and the sciences are contrasted,
-the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes} and the latter for \textsf{oxyear}.
+the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum}
+and the latter for \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear}.
 Where neither version gives explicit guidance on citing a resource supported by \textsf{biblatex},
-\textsf{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex}
+\pkg[biblatex]{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex}
 and other major referencing styles.
 
 Where it is practical to do so,
@@ -456,7 +461,7 @@ see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
 
 \section{To do}
 
-The \textsf{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
+The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
 As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
 interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
 styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
@@ -484,9 +489,6 @@ I would be most glad to hear from you:
   \end{itemize}
 \end{multicols}
 
-It is not possible at the moment to use numeric or alphabetic citation styles
-with \textsf{oxref}, but that might change in the future.
-
 You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
 \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
 as well.
@@ -494,7 +496,7 @@ as well.
 \chapter{Citations and common formatting}\label{sec:citing}
 
 The \textsf{oxnotes} bibliography style is intended for use with a footnote or endnote citation style,
-and indeed loads a generic \textsf{biblatex} one.
+and indeed loads a standard \textsf{biblatex} one.
 While the note text generated by the style is very similar to that which appears in the bibliography,
 there is a difference in how author names are printed.
 
@@ -526,13 +528,13 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an al
 \subsection{Missing attribution}
 Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under ‘Anonymous’ (or ‘Anon.\@’ in the latter case) in the bibliography.
 
-\tip{\textsf{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
   Doing this will automatically suppress the printing of the anonymous author in notes.
 }
 
 \begin{egcite}{}
 \cite{anon1822san}.
-\cite{anon1956lu}.
+\textcite{anon1956lu}.
 \end{egcite}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -573,19 +575,20 @@ Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, fa
 to add the prefix ‘Pseudo-’ before the name in notes, and
 to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
 
-\tip{With \textsf{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
 Since this mechanism is aimed at ancient texts, it has only been designed to work with single-part names
 (i.e. either a single word, or a whole name wrapped in braces).
 }
 
 \begin{egcite}{}
-\cite{boethius1976dds}
+\textcite{boethius1976dds}
 \end{egcite}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.2.1>
 {boethius1976dds}
-\textsc{Boethius (Ps.-)}, \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. Olga Weijers (Leiden, 1976).\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\textsc{Boethius (Ps.-)}, \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. Olga Weijers (Leiden, 1976).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @book{boethius1976dds,
@@ -604,7 +607,7 @@ Since this mechanism is aimed at ancient texts, it has only been designed to wor
 If the attribution is missing from the work but may be inferred from other sources,
 Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 
-\tip{With \textsf{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field
   (usually \code{author} or \code{editor}) with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   You can also annotate names individually within the list, if only some of them should be taken as inferred.}
 
@@ -626,7 +629,7 @@ Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
   If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
-  Note, however, that \textsf{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
 
 \subsection{Pseudonyms}
 
@@ -696,7 +699,8 @@ This is only supposed to to printed in the bibliography, not in notes.
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.17.4>
 {joukovsky1967gdd}
-\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}\textsc{Joukovsky, F.} (= \textsc{Joukovsky-Micha, F.}), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29 (1967), 55–92.
+\textsc{Joukovsky, F.} (= \textsc{Joukovsky-Micha, F.}), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29 (1967), 55–92.
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @article{joukovsky1967gdd,
@@ -723,7 +727,8 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 {kuehner.blass1890ef}
-\textsc{Kühner, Raphael}, rev. \textsc{Blass, Friedrich}, \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung, 1890-2).\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\textsc{Kühner, Raphael}, rev. \textsc{Blass, Friedrich}, \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung, 1890-2).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @mvbook{kuehner.blass1890ef,
@@ -741,7 +746,31 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \textsf{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+
+\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
+
+Generally speaking, using titular prefixes like Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on as part of an author's name is unnecessary,
+but there are occasions when removing them can cause problems, so with \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} you can supply them if you need to.
+I have not added special rules for recognizing such titles, so if you want to include one you have to label each part of the name explicitly, as in the following example (the keyword for the titular prefix is \code{title}).
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2*>
+{wood1861el}
+Mrs Henry Wood, \emph{East Lynne}, 3 vols. (London, 1861).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{wood1861el,
+  author = {title=Mrs, given=Henry, family=Wood},
+  title = {East Lynne},
+  volumes = {3},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1861}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+You can switch the display of titular prefixes on or off using the \key{usenametitles} option.
+This can be set globally or on a per-type or per-entry basis.
 
 \section{Works in foreign languages}
 
@@ -859,9 +888,9 @@ A. A. Milne, \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam
 
 For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
 
-\tip{To have \textsf{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
 
-\tip{To have \textsf{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
   This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -975,7 +1004,7 @@ Shu Li et al., \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \textsf{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.}
+\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1>
 {lindars1965eir}
@@ -1373,7 +1402,7 @@ Rosemary Stewart et al. (eds.), \emph{Managing in Britain} (London, 1994).
 
 Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
 
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \textsf{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1457,7 +1486,7 @@ Heinrich Ritter, \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. Alexander J. W
   all in \S13.11.1). I am therefore choosing to ignore this unnecessary
   complication.}
 
-\tip{You can alternatively use the standard \textsf{biblatex} relation type \code{multivolume}. Note that this construction is not portable to \textsf{oxyear}.}
+\tip{You can alternatively use the standard \textsf{biblatex} relation type \code{multivolume}. Note that this construction is not portable to \textsf{oxyear}\slash\textsf{oxalph}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.2.6*>
@@ -1565,7 +1594,7 @@ Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title,
 and there are many volumes spanning years and possibly publishers,
 the following form is used:
 
-\spec{Author, \emph{VolTitle}, (\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+\spec{Author, \emph{VolTitle}, [\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title] (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
 
 \tip{To get this format, use \code{book} instead of \code{mvbook}.}
 
@@ -1763,9 +1792,10 @@ the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests putting the original date in a note at
 rather than within the publication block%
 .
 
-\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{first pub.} Year).}
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{originally pub.} Year).}
 
 \tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
+\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.2.3>
@@ -1877,7 +1907,7 @@ Cyril Hare, \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London, 1949); repr. as \emph{The Wind B
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 \tip{A more generalized version of this relation is available.
-  If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \textsf{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas},
+  If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas},
   the edition and any editorial contributions will be printed in the linking text.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -2541,7 +2571,7 @@ The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} opt
 \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
 \chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
 
-There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \textsf{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
+There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
 
 \section{Audio recordings}
 
@@ -2570,7 +2600,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording
   a publishing company, comma, location, comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Christophorus-Verlag Herder, Freiburg im Breisgau,}
 \end{itemize}
 
-\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \textsf{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to.
+\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to.
 
 \tip{To get the normal format, put the label name in \code{publisher}, the type of release (e.g.\@ compact disc, audio cassette) in \code{type}, and the catalogue number in \code{number}. In the examples from \emph{New Hart's Rules}, the type is uniformly omitted.}
 
@@ -2897,7 +2927,7 @@ Arthur Rubinstein, \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderat
 
 \section{Broadcasts}\label{sec:broadcasts}
 
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \textsf{Oxref} sides with the latter.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} sides with the latter.
 
 \spec{\emph{Title}, Channel (Location, Date, Time).}
 
@@ -2921,7 +2951,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 
 \tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
   If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
-  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \textsf{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
@@ -3156,6 +3186,7 @@ Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative
   title = {Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}},
   journaltitle = {The Spectator},
   date = {2013-05-20},
+  options = {varissuedate=false},
   url = {http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/},
   urldate = {2013-11-09}}
 \end{Verbatim}
@@ -3183,7 +3214,7 @@ Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative
   it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
   or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
 
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \textsf{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
@@ -3195,7 +3226,7 @@ Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative
   title = {Oxford University Press},
   organization = {Wikipedia},
   date = {2013-11-05},
-  datetype = {last modified},
+  datetype = {modified},
   url = {http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 \end{Verbatim}
@@ -3328,10 +3359,10 @@ United Nations, \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-ROM] (N
 \chapter{Legal references}\label{sec:legal}
 \chapterprecis{commentary, jurisdiction, legal, legislation}
 
-\textsf{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text.
 For a more thorough and robust treatment, intended for a specialist readership, I recommend you use the \href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/oscola}{\textsf{oscola}} style instead.
 
-Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \textsf{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \textsf{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes.
+Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes.
 
 
 \section{Cases}
@@ -3484,7 +3515,7 @@ Test\footcite[13]{rvg2004}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \textsf{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}.
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}.
 
 \tip{To print the court of decision plain, you can use the \key{court-plain} option. You can set this globally at the style level or on a per-entry basis.}
 
@@ -3812,7 +3843,7 @@ Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport [196
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \textsf{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.}
+\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S13.5.2>
@@ -3926,7 +3957,7 @@ Law Commission, \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm
 
 \section{Commentaries}
 
-\textsf{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries;
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries;
 it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
 
 \chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
@@ -4003,7 +4034,7 @@ If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted
 \tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the poem is published on its own,
   and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{poem} if the poem is published in an anthology.}
 
-\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \textsf{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
   \code{book}, \code{canto}, and \code{stanza} (\code{line} is already defined),
   though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
 
@@ -4038,7 +4069,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
 \tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the play is published on its own,
   and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{play} if the play is published in an anthology.}
 
-\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \textsf{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
   \code{act} and \code{scene} (\code{line} is already defined),
   though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
 
@@ -4046,9 +4077,9 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
 
 \spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
 
-With \textsf{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
+With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
 
-\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\textsf{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \textsf{oxref} will handle all this for you.}
+\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will handle all this for you.}
 
 \tip{Use \code{author} and \code{date} as normal. Note that the \code{date} will not be printed if both the \code{author} and \code{title}\slash \code{descriptor} fields are left blank.}
 
@@ -4077,7 +4108,7 @@ Francis Smith, travel diaries, 1912–7, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.
-\textsf{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model.
 
 \tip{You can use \code{author}, \code{title}\slash \code{note}\slash \code{descriptor} and \code{date} as described above. (This is a departure from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.)}
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0034d3b919c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2412a84852c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,4163 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `oxnum-doc.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% oxref.dtx  (with options: `doc,m')
+%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
+%% biblatex-oxref --- Biblatex styles inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style
+%% Author:  Alex Ball
+%% E-mail:  a.j.ball@bath.ac.uk
+%% License: Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
+%% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+\def\Version{2017/11/18 v0.11}
+\ProvidesFile{oxnum-doc.tex}
+    [\Version\space Numeric biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
+\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnum,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
+\documentclass[extrafontsizes,11pt,a4paper,oneside]{memoir}
+\setlrmarginsandblock{3cm}{3cm}{*}
+\setulmarginsandblock{2.5cm}{2.5cm}{*}
+\checkandfixthelayout
+\chapterstyle{ell}
+\renewcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
+  \vspace*{\prechapterprecisshift}%
+  \begin{flushright}\precisfont
+}
+\renewcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{flushright}}
+\hangsecnum
+\setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}
+\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\scshape\raggedright}
+\setsecnumdepth{subsection}
+\nouppercaseheads
+\makeoddhead{myheadings}{\textsc{\leftmark}}{}{\thepage}
+\makepsmarks{myheadings}{%
+  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}}%
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}%
+}
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\aliaspagestyle{title}{empty}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\nonzeroparskip
+\firmlists
+
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[mono=false,defaultfeatures={SmallCapsFeatures={Letters=SmallCaps,Renderer=Basic,Ligatures=NoCommon}}]{libertine}
+\usepackage{fontawesome}[2015/07/07]
+\newcommand{\booksym}{\makebox[1em][c]{\faicon{book}}}
+\newcommand{\cogsym}{\makebox[1em][c]{\faicon{cog}}}
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{fontspec}{%
+  \setmonofont[Scale=MatchLowercase,StylisticSet=1,AutoFakeSlant]{Inconsolatazi4}
+}{%
+  \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+  \usepackage[varl]{zi4}
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\usepackage{xcolor,xparse}
+\definecolor{Green}{rgb}{0,.5,0}
+\colorlet{ok}{Green}
+\colorlet{todo}{red}
+\colorlet{hacked}{orange}
+\colorlet{manual}{purple}
+
+\usepackage{tcolorbox}
+\tcbuselibrary{skins,xparse,documentation,breakable,minted}
+\colorlet{Option}{violet}
+\colorlet{Command}{red!75!black}
+\colorlet{Environment}{blue!75!black}
+\colorlet{Value}{olive!75!black}
+\colorlet{Color}{cyan!75!black}
+\tcbset
+  { enhanced
+  , listing engine=minted
+  , minted options=
+    { breaklines
+    , fontsize=\footnotesize
+    }
+  , index format=pgf
+  , color command=Command
+  , color environment=Environment
+  , color key=Option
+  , color value=Value
+  , color color=Color
+  }
+\renewcommand{\theFancyVerbLine}{\footnotesize\itshape\color{gray}\arabic{FancyVerbLine}}
+\let\tcbcs=\cs
+\renewcommand*{\cs}[1]{\textcolor{Command}{\tcbcs{#1}}}
+\def\sqbrackets#1{%
+  \texttt{\textcolor{Option}{[}#1\textcolor{Option}{]}}}
+\def\brackets#1{%
+  \texttt{\textcolor{Environment}{\char`\{}#1\textcolor{Environment}{\char`\}}}}
+\def\marg#1{%
+  \textcolor{Environment}{\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}\textcolor{Environment}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
+\newcommand*{\env}[1]{\textcolor{Environment}{\ttfamily #1}}
+\newcommand*{\key}[1]{\textcolor{Option}{\ttfamily #1}}
+\newcommand*{\val}[1]{\textcolor{Value}{\ttfamily #1}}
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\resetmintedformat}{%
+  % Comments
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@c\endcsname{\let\PYGdefault@it=\textit\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{gray}{####1}}}
+  % Command sequences
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@k\endcsname{\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{Command}{####1}}}
+  % Optional arguments
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@na\endcsname{\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{Option}{####1}}}
+  % Braces
+  \expandafter\def\csname PYGdefault@tok@nb\endcsname{\def\PYGdefault@tc####1{\textcolor{Environment}{####1}}}
+}
+\apptocmd{\minted@checkstyle}{\resetmintedformat}{}{}
+\makeatother
+
+\RecustomVerbatimEnvironment
+  {Verbatim}{Verbatim}
+  {commentchar=\%}
+
+\usepackage{xpatch,csquotes,multicol}
+
+\usepackage
+[backend=biber%
+,hyperref=false%
+]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{oxref.bib}
+\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{900}
+\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{800}
+\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{700}
+\DeclareBibliographyCategory{hidden}
+\makeatletter
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usedriver
+     {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}}
+     {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{postnote}\finentrypunct}
+\makeatother
+\DeclareSourcemap{%
+  \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+    \map[overwrite=true]{%
+      \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+\hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
+\usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
+\crefname{page}{page}{pages}
+
+\NewDocumentCommand{\pkg}{om}{%
+  \IfNoValueTF{#1}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1-#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\lit}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\code}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\aside}[1]{\textcolor{violet}{[\textsc{tip:} #1]}}
+\newcommand{\tip}[1]{\hangfrom{\makebox[2em][c]{\faLightbulbO}}#1\par}
+\newcommand{\info}[1]{\hangfrom{\makebox[2em][c]{\faInfoCircle}}#1\par}
+\newcommand{\hack}[1]{\hangfrom{\makebox[2em][c]{\faWrench}}#1\par}
+
+\makeatletter
+\def\CiteStatus{todo}
+\newcommand{\dbgcolor}[2]{%
+  \bgroup
+  \blx@citecmdinit
+  \blx@citeinit
+  \def\blx@precode{}%
+  \def\blx@postcode{}%
+  \def\blx@loopcode{%
+    \iffieldundef{userd}
+    {\xdef\CiteStatus{ok}}
+    {\xdef\CiteStatus{\abx@field@userd}}}%
+  \blx@citeloop{#1}%
+  \textcolor{\CiteStatus}{#2}%
+  \egroup
+}
+\makeatother
+\NewTColorBox{bibexbox}{D(){ok}d<>omo}%
+  {bicolor
+  ,colframe = #1
+  ,colback = #1!5!white
+  ,colbacklower = white
+  ,fontlower = \footnotesize
+  ,before upper = {\hangfrom{\booksym\space}\biburlsetup}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#3}%
+    {after upper = {\par\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}\fullcite{#4}}
+    }%
+    {after upper = {\par\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}\fullcite[#3]{#4}}
+    ,title = {\texttt{\string\fullcite[#3]\{#4\}}}
+    }
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#2}{}%
+    {overlay = {
+      \node[anchor=south east,text=teal] at (frame.south east) {#2};
+      }
+    }
+  ,phantomlabel={ex:#4}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#5}{}{#5}
+  }
+\NewTotalTColorBox{\spec}{m}%
+  {enhanced
+  ,sharp corners = west
+  ,colframe = teal
+  ,colback = teal!5!white
+  ,toprule = 0pt
+  ,bottomrule = 0pt
+  ,rightrule = 0pt
+  }{#1}
+\NewTCBListing{egcite}{D(){ok}omo}%
+  {colframe = #1
+  ,colback = #1!5!white
+  ,listing side text
+  ,lefthand width = 14em
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#2}{}{title = #2}
+  ,before lower = {\raggedright\ifblank{#3}{}{\hangfrom{\booksym\space}#3\par}\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#4}{}{#4}}
+\NewTCBListing{egcite*}{D(){ok}omo}%
+  {colframe = #1
+  ,colback = #1!5!white
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#2}{}{title = #2}
+  ,before lower = {\raggedright\ifblank{#3}{}{\hangfrom{\booksym\space}#3\par}\hangfrom{\cogsym\space}}
+  ,IfNoValueTF={#4}{}{#4}}
+
+\frenchspacing
+
+\usepackage[british]{isodate}
+\usepackage{readprov}
+\GetFileInfo{\jobname.tex}
+\title{OXNUM -- A numeric style for Biblatex}
+\author{Alex Ball}
+\date{\printdateTeX{\filedate}}
+\begin{document}
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+\begin{adjustwidth}{.2\textwidth}{0pt}
+  \sffamily\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
+  \LARGE\textsc{oxref bundle}
+
+  \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+  \LARGE\thetitle
+
+  \bigskip
+  \Large\theauthor
+
+  \bigskip
+  \Large\thedate
+
+  \bigskip
+  \Large\fileversion
+\end{adjustwidth}
+
+\vspace{\stretch{3}}
+\noindent
+\hspace*{.1\textwidth}\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\rule{\normalrulethickness}{\textheight}}
+
+\newpage
+\tableofcontents*
+
+\chapter{Introduction}
+
+\section{Loading the style}\label{sec:loading}
+
+The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}:
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\usepackage[style=oxnum]{biblatex}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
+
+\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
+  Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
+  By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\docValue{literal}
+    means no special handling is used.
+  \item\docValue{long}
+    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+    in the bibliography.
+  \item\docValue{short}
+    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+    in the bibliography.
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{dashed}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  In the biblography, replaces recurring author\slash editor names with a dash.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{ecli}{=\val{yes}|\val{only}|\val{no}}{default \val{yes}, initially \val{yes}}
+  Determines when ECLI numbers for EU legal cases are printed (if provided).
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\docValue{yes}
+    prints the ECLI number in addition to the official report.
+  \item\docValue{only}
+    prints the ECLI number instead of the official report.
+  \item\docValue{no}
+    only prints the ECLI number if the case is otherwise unreported.
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{isourls}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
+  Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\docValue{slash}
+    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+  \item\docValue{colon}
+    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+  \item\docValue{comma}
+    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+  \item\docValue{parens}
+    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{docKey}
+
+
+\begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
+  Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+  Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
+  Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{relationpunct}{=\val{period}|\val{comma}|\val{semicolon}|\val{colon}|\val{space}}{default \val{semicolon}, initially \val{semicolon}}
+  Sets the punctuation that precedes the \code{relatedtype} localization string.
+  An additional space is assumed unless the value is \val{space}.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+  Note that the general and per-type settings are ignored for some values of \code{relatedtype},
+  but the per-entry setting is always effective.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{scnames}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Prints initial author or editor names in bibliography entries in small capitals.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{usenametitles}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{true}}
+  Controls whether titular prefixes such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed.
+  (See \cref{sec:nametitles} for how to supply titles as part of a name.)
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+\end{docKey}
+
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
+It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
+In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
+
+\section{How to use this document}
+
+Bibliographical items are given throughout this document, and serve three purposes:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item
+  To demonstrate which of the variations discussed by the
+  \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} have been chosen
+  in this style.
+  \item
+  To help me, as package author, check that the style is working as intended.
+  \item
+  To show you, as document author, how to use the style to get the effect you want.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Examples that follow standard \textsf{biblatex} semantics, and are therefore
+(mostly) portable to other styles, are in green:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}%
+  [bicolor
+  ,colframe = ok
+  ,colback = ok!5!white
+  ,colbacklower = white
+  ,fontlower = \footnotesize\ttfamily
+  ,overlay = {\node[anchor=south east,text=teal] at (frame.south east) {Source};}
+  ]
+  \hangfrom{\booksym\space} Reference text as it should look.\par
+  \hangfrom{\cogsym\space} Reference text as generated by \textsf{biblatex}.
+  \tcblower
+  Code used in bibliography file.
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
+Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+to other styles, are in amber:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}%
+  [bicolor
+  ,colframe = hacked
+  ,colback = hacked!5!white
+  ,colbacklower = white
+  ,fontlower = \footnotesize\ttfamily
+  ,overlay = {\node[anchor=south east,text=teal] at (frame.south east) {Source};}
+  ]
+  \hangfrom{\booksym\space} Reference text as it should look.\par
+  \hangfrom{\cogsym\space} Reference text as generated by \textsf{biblatex}.
+  \tcblower
+  Code used in bibliography file.
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
+Where a source is provided, it refers to a section from one of the reference works below:
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[OGS]
+\fullcite{ritter2002ogs}
+
+\item[NHR]
+\fullcite{waddingham2014nhr}
+\end{description}
+
+Where the source is starred (*), this indicates the example is not quite how it appears in the book,
+usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} default.
+
+\section{Design philosophy}
+
+The stipulations given by the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} regarding citations and references
+amount not so much to a consistent style as a body of advice for creating one.
+Unlike the style manuals published by the American Psychological Association,
+the Modern Language Association, and the University of Chicago to name but three,
+the emphasis of the Oxford guide is to describe good practice rather than prescribe a particular style.
+This means that when it comes to \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, there are decisions to be made
+as to which variations to support by default, which to support as options,
+and which to ignore quietly.
+
+The situation is complicated further by the nature of the available versions.
+The 2002 guide remains the most comprehensive in terms of rules, principles and examples.
+The succeeding versions, under the title \emph{New Hart's Rules},
+update the aspects of the 2002 guide that now seem somewhat dated,
+such as its handling of URLs and DOIs,
+and have more of an eye on machine processing of bibliographies.
+They do, however, introduce additional variations with less of a steer on what is preferred,
+and are considerably shorter with fewer examples.
+
+The approach of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible,
+but where variations are given without strong preference, or where guidance is lacking,
+to follow the preferences of the 2002 guide.
+Where the practices of the humanities and the sciences are contrasted,
+the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum}
+and the latter for \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear}.
+Where neither version gives explicit guidance on citing a resource supported by \textsf{biblatex},
+\pkg[biblatex]{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex}
+and other major referencing styles.
+
+Where it is practical to do so,
+ways and means of achieving the variations defined by the two guides are provided,
+but by no means all of them will be supported.
+
+\section{Technical documentation}
+
+For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
+see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
+
+\section{To do}
+
+The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
+As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
+interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
+styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
+thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
+At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
+behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
+
+I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
+are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
+rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
+I would be most glad to hear from you:
+
+\begin{multicols}{3}
+  \begin{itemize}\firmlist
+    \item suppbook
+    \item booklet
+    \item suppcollection
+    \item patent
+    \item suppperiodical
+    \item artwork
+    \item commentary
+    \item letter
+    \item performance
+    \item standard
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{multicols}
+
+You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
+\href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
+as well.
+
+\chapter{Citations and common formatting}\label{sec:citing}
+
+The \textsf{oxnum} bibliography style is intended for use with a numeric citation style,
+and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one.
+
+\section{Test citations}
+
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+Test \parencites%
+  [93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
+  [72]{hankinson1989gba}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+
+\subsection{Missing attribution}
+
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{anon1822san}
+\textsc{Anon.}, \emph{Stories after Nature} (London: Allman, 1822).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{anon1822san,
+  author = {Anonymous},
+  title = {Stories after Nature},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Allman},
+  date = {1822}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{anon1956lu}
+\textsc{Anon.}, \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée, 1956).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{anon1956lu,
+  author = {Anonymous},
+  title = {Liber usualis},
+  location = {Tournai},
+  publisher = {Desclée},
+  year = {1956}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{anon1822san,anon1956lu}
+\end{egcite}
+
+
+\subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
+Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
+to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
+}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{boethius1976dds}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{boethius1976dds}
+\textsc{Boethius (Ps.-)}, \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. Olga Weijers (Leiden, 1976).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{boethius1976dds,
+  author = {Boethius},
+  author+an = {1=pseudo},
+  title = {De disciplina scolarium},
+  subtitle = {Édition critique, introduction et notes},
+  editor = {Olga Weijers},
+  location = {Leiden},
+  date = {1976}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Inferred attribution}
+
+If the attribution is missing from the work but may be inferred from other sources,
+Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field
+  (usually \code{author} or \code{editor}) with the keyword \code{inferred}.
+  You can also annotate names individually within the list, if only some of them should be taken as inferred.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{balfour1768pe}
+{[James Balfour]}, \emph{Philosophical Essays} (Edinburgh, 1768).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{balfour1768pe,
+  author = {James Balfour},
+  author+an = {=inferred},
+  title = {Philosophical Essays},
+  location = {Edinburgh},
+  date = {1768}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
+  If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
+  The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+
+\subsection{Pseudonyms}
+
+If an author publishes under a pen name, and you want to link the names in the bibliography,
+the name as given in the work should be given first, immediately followed by the other name
+in parentheses (\emph{Oxford Guide to Style}) or brackets (\emph{New Hart's Rules}).
+
+\tip{If you don't mind the second name being printed as-is,
+  the canonical place to include it is the \code{nameaddon} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2>
+{dodgson1896sl}
+C. L. Dodgson [Lewis Carroll], \emph{Symbolic Logic} (Oxford, 1896).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{dodgson1896sl,
+  author = {C. L. Dodgson},
+  nameaddon = {Lewis Carroll},
+  title = {Symbolic Logic},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1896}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{You can switch to using parentheses for name addons by changing the \code{nameaddon} field format.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{nameaddon}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+\tip{If you do want the second name to be normalized, or you are dealing with a list of names,
+  you can use the (non-standard) \code{authoraddon} and \code{editoraddon} fields. The addon
+  name will be printed after the corresponding name in the regular name list, using the
+  \code{nameaddon} field format, but only if it is different.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2>
+{lauder1965lss}
+Afferbeck Lauder [Alistair Morrison], \emph{Let Stalk Strine} (Sydney, 1965).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{lauder1965lss,
+  author = {Afferbeck Lauder},
+  authoraddon = {Alistair Morrison},
+  title = {Let Stalk Strine},
+  location = {Sydney},
+  date = {1965}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Again, you can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
+  If you specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{authoraddon}.
+  The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.}
+
+\section{Name variants}
+
+In cases where an author changes the name under which they publish (e.g.\ due to changes of marital status), both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest putting the later form of the name first, followed by parentheses containing an equals sign and the earier form of the name.
+
+\tip{To trigger this formatting, annotate the relevant name in \code{authoraddon} or \code{editoraddon} with the keyword \code{variant}.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{joukovsky1967gdd}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.17.4>
+{joukovsky1967gdd}
+\textsc{Joukovsky, F.} (= \textsc{Joukovsky-Micha, F.}), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29 (1967), 55–92.
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{joukovsky1967gdd,
+  author = {F. Joukovsky},
+  authoraddon = {F. Joukovsky-Micha},
+  authoraddon+an = {1=variant},
+  title = {La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e}
+    siècle (1500\textendash 1585)},
+  journaltitle = {Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance},
+  volume = {29},
+  date = {1967},
+  langid = {french},
+  pages = {55-92}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Author-translators and author-revisers}
+
+If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joint authors, Oxford style is to print them immediately after the actual author. The motivation comes from textbooks like this one:
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite{kuehner.blass1890ef}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{kuehner.blass1890ef}
+\textsc{Kühner, Raphael}, rev. \textsc{Blass, Friedrich}, \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung, 1890-2).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{kuehner.blass1890ef,
+  author = {Raphael Kühner},
+  editor = {Friedrich Blass},
+  editor+an = {=jointauthor},
+  editortype = {reviser},
+  shortauthor = {Kühner--Blass},
+  title = {Elementar- und Formenlehre},
+  maintitle = {Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache},
+  volume = {1},
+  location = {Hannover},
+  publisher = {Hahnsche Buchhandlung},
+  date = {1890/1892}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+
+\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
+
+Generally speaking, using titular prefixes like Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on as part of an author's name is unnecessary,
+but there are occasions when removing them can cause problems, so with \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} you can supply them if you need to.
+I have not added special rules for recognizing such titles, so if you want to include one you have to label each part of the name explicitly, as in the following example (the keyword for the titular prefix is \code{title}).
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2*>
+{wood1861el}
+Mrs Henry Wood, \emph{East Lynne}, 3 vols. (London, 1861).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{wood1861el,
+  author = {title=Mrs, given=Henry, family=Wood},
+  title = {East Lynne},
+  volumes = {3},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1861}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+You can switch the display of titular prefixes on or off using the \key{usenametitles} option.
+This can be set globally or on a per-type or per-entry basis.
+
+\section{Works in foreign languages}
+
+If you used a foreign language work, you might want to recommend a good translation.
+
+\tip{Add the translation in \code{related}, and set \code{relatedtype} to \code{translationas}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.5*>
+{tschichold1955tg}
+J. Tschichold, \emph{Typographische Gestaltung} (Basle, 1955); Eng. trans. as \emph{Asymmetric Typography} (London, 1967).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{tschichold1955tg,
+  author = {J. Tschichold},
+  title = {Typographische Gestaltung},
+  location = {Basle},
+  date = {1955},
+  related = {tschichold1967tg},
+  relatedtype = {translationas}}
+@book{tschichold1967tg,
+  title = {Asymmetric Typography},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1967}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{To specify the translator up front, set the \code{relatedtype} to \code{bytranslator} instead.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.14>
+{sarrau1975ta}
+José Sarrau, \emph{Tapas y aperitivos} (Madrid, 1975); trans. Francesca Piemonte Slesinger as \emph{Tapas and Appetizers} (New York, 1987).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{sarrau1975ta,
+  author = {José Sarrau},
+  title = {Tapas y aperitivos},
+  location = {Madrid},
+  date = {1975},
+  related = {sarrau1987ta},
+  relatedtype = {bytranslator}}
+@book{sarrau1987ta,
+  author = {José Sarrau},
+  translator = {Francesca Piemonte Slesinger},
+  title = {Tapas and Appetizers},
+  location = {New York},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+If you used the translation, you might want to give the original publication as well.
+
+\tip{Add the original in \code{related}, and set \code{relatedtype} to \code{translationof}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.5>
+{metz1938hyb}
+R. Metz, \emph{A Hundred Years of British Philosophy}, ed. J. H. Muirhead, trans. J. W. Harvey (1938) [Ger. orig., \emph{Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien} (1935)]
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{metz1938hyb,
+  author = {R. Metz},
+  title = {A Hundred Years of British Philosophy},
+  editor = {J. H. Muirhead},
+  translator = {J. W. Harvey},
+  date = {1938},
+  related = {metz1935psg},
+  relatedtype = {translationof}}
+@book{metz1935psg,
+  title = {Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien},
+  date = {1935},
+  language = {german}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is often helpful to provide an informative translation of foreign language titles.
+
+\tip{Put the translation in \code{titleaddon}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.5>
+{nissan1965hnm}
+Nissan Motor Corporation, \emph{Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi} [A 30-year history of Nissan Motors] (1965).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{nissan1965hnm,
+  author = {{Nissan Motor Corporation}},
+  title = {Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi},
+  titleaddon = {A 30-year history of Nissan Motors},
+  date = {1965}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Conversely, it might be helpful to provide the English original of a translated title.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{milne1938pb}
+A. A. Milne, \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam: Williams, 1938).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{milne1938pb,
+  author = {A. A. Milne},
+  title = {Pu der Bär},
+  language = {german},
+  origtitle = {Winnie the Pooh},
+  location = {Potsdam},
+  publisher = {Williams},
+  date = {1938}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Missing place of publication}
+
+For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
+
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
+  This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.9>
+{padua1961p}
+Marchetto of Padua, \emph{Pomerium}, ed. Guiseppe Vecchi (n.p., 1961).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{padua1961p,
+  author = {{Marchetto of Padua}},
+  title = {Pomerium},
+  editor = {Guiseppe Vecchi},
+  date = {1961},
+  options = {nolocation}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
+\chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
+
+\section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{goldblatt1973dmm}
+Robert Goldblatt, \enquote{Diodorean Modality in Minkowski Space-Time}, \emph{Studia Logica}, 39/3 (1973), 219--36.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{goldblatt1973dmm,
+  author = {Robert Goldblatt},
+  title = {Diodorean Modality in Minkowski Space-Time},
+  journaltitle = {Studia Logica},
+  volume = {39},
+  number = {3},
+  date = {1973},
+  pages = {219-236}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{inalcik1992csm}
+Halil Inalcik, \enquote{Comments on \enquote{Sultanism}: Max Weber's Typification of the Ottoman Polity}, \emph{Princeton Papers in Near Eastern Studies}, 1 (1992), 49--72.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{inalcik1992csm,
+  author = {Halil Inalcik},
+  title = {Comments on \enquote{Sultanism}},
+  subtitle = {Max Weber's Typification of the Ottoman Polity},
+  journaltitle = {Princeton Papers in Near Eastern Studies},
+  volume = {1},
+  date = {1992},
+  pages = {49-72}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{vaucouleurs1975nmn}
+Gerald de Vaucouleurs et al., \enquote{The New Martian Nomenclature of the International Astronomical Union}, \emph{Icarus}, 26 (1975), 85--98.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{vaucouleurs1975nmn,
+  author = {Gerald de Vaucouleurs and J. Blunck and M. Davies and A. Dollfus and I. Koval and
+    G. Kuiper and H. Masursky and S. Miyamoto and V Moroz and Carl Sagan},
+  title = {The New {Martian} Nomenclature of the {International} {Astronomical} {Union}},
+  journaltitle = {Icarus},
+  volume = {26},
+  date = {1975},
+  pages = {85-98}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{druin2002rcd}
+A. Druin, \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, \emph{Behaviour \& Information Technology}, 21/1 (2002), 1–25. doi: \path{10.1080/01449290110108659}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{druin2002rcd,
+  author = {A. Druin},
+  title = {The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology},
+  journaltitle = {Behaviour \& Information Technology},
+  volume = {21},
+  number = {1},
+  date = {2002},
+  pages = {1-25},
+  doi = {10.1080/01449290110108659}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
+{li.etal2013flh}
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{li.etal2013flh,
+  author = {Shu Li and Chungkun Shih and Chen Wang and Hong Pang and Dong Ren},
+  title = {Forever Love},
+  subtitle = {The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China},
+  journaltitle = {{PLoS ONE}},
+  volume = {8},
+  number = {11},
+  date = {2013},
+  eid = {e78188},
+  doi = {10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{lindars1965eir}
+B. Lindars, \enquote{Ezechiel and Individual Responsibility}, \emph{VT} 15 (1965), 452--67.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{lindars1965eir,
+  author = {B. Lindars},
+  title = {Ezechiel and Individual Responsibility},
+  journaltitle = {VT},
+  volume = {15},
+  date = {1965},
+  pages = {452-467}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1*>
+{jsr1990spt}
+\enquote{Solar Photon Thruster}, \emph{Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets}, 28/4 (July–Aug. 1990), 411–6.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{jsr1990spt,
+  title = {Solar Photon Thruster},
+  journaltitle = {Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets},
+  volume = {28},
+  number = {4},
+  date = {1990-07/1990-08},
+  pages = {411-416}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Articles in periodicals with series}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, nth \lit{ser}., Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.3.3>
+{moody1953mdb}
+T. W. Moody, \enquote{Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906}, \emph{Transactions of the Royal Historical Society}, 5th ser., 3 (1953), 53--76.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{moody1953mdb,
+  author = {T. W. Moody},
+  title = {Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906},
+  journaltitle = {Transactions of the Royal Historical Society},
+  series = {5},
+  volume = {3},
+  date = {1953},
+  pages = {53-76}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, \textsc{ns} Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.3>
+{barnes1971has}
+J. Barnes, \enquote{Homonymy in Aristotle and Speusippus}, \emph{Classical Quarterly}, \textsc{ns} 21 (1971), 65--80.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{barnes1971has,
+  author = {J. Barnes},
+  title = {Homonymy in Aristotle and Speusippus},
+  journaltitle = {Classical Quarterly},
+  series = {newseries},
+  volume = {21},
+  date = {1971},
+  pages = {65--80}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Articles in issues identified by date alone}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Day Month Year, Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{bw1984wen}
+\enquote{Who's Excellent Now?}, \emph{Business Week}, 5 Nov. 1984, 76--86.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{bw1984wen,
+  title = {Who's Excellent Now?},
+  journaltitle = {Business Week},
+  date = {1984-11-05},
+  pages = {76-86}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{lee1995ehf}
+Alan Lee, \enquote{England Haunted by Familiar Failings}, \emph{The Times}, 23 June 1995.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{lee1995ehf,
+  author = {Alan Lee},
+  title = {England Haunted by Familiar Failings},
+  journaltitle = {The Times},
+  date = {1995-06-23}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3>
+{boyce1957pgi}
+M. Boyce, \enquote{The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition}, \emph{Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society}, 1957, 10--45.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{boyce1957pgi,
+  author = {M. Boyce},
+  title = {The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition},
+  journaltitle = {Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society},
+  date = {1957},
+  pages = {10-45}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Works published as an issue}
+
+These examples illustrate where a book is also published as a whole
+issue of a periodical, and show how you may reference both at once.
+You can either add the periodical details to a book entry
+or add the book details to a periodical entry.
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Location: Publisher, Year), pages.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{equals} as the \code{relatedtype}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{bec1976isc}
+C. Bec (ed.), \emph{Italie 1500--1550: Une situation de crise?} = \emph{Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin}, 1975/2 (Langues étrangères, 2; Lyon, 1976), 99--109.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@collection{bec1976isc,
+  editor = {C. Bec},
+  title = {Italie 1500--1550},
+  subtitle = {Une situation de crise?},
+  related = {aujm1975.2},
+  relatedtype = {equals},
+  series = {Langues étrangères},
+  number = {2},
+  location = {Lyon},
+  date = {1976},
+  pages = {99--109}}
+@periodical{aujm1975.2,
+  title = {Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin},
+  volume = {1975},
+  number = {2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year).}
+
+\tip{Use \code{issuetitle} instead of \code{title} to get the right formatting.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{trisoglio1973gnq}
+F. Trisoglio, \emph{Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)} = \emph{Rivista Iasalliana}, 40 (1973).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{trisoglio1973gnq,
+  author = {F. Trisoglio},
+  issuetitle = {Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)},
+  journaltitle = {Rivista Iasalliana},
+  volume = {40},
+  date = {1973}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Articles in an issue that is a supplement to another issue}
+
+\DeclareNumChars*{S}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year); \lit{Supplement to} \emph{MainJournalTitle} Vol/Number, Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the parent issue, reference it in the \code{related} field, and use the key \code{suppto} as the \code{relatedtype}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.1>
+{zhentao.etal1989ars}
+X. Zhentao, K. K. C. Yau, and F. R. Stephenson, \enquote{Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones}, \emph{Archaeoastronomy}, 14 (1989); Supplement to \emph{Journal for the History of Astronomy}, 20, pp. S61--S72.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{zhentao.etal1989ars,
+  author = {X. Zhentao and K. K. C. Yau and F. R. Stephenson},
+  title = {Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones},
+  journaltitle = {Archaeoastronomy},
+  volume = {14},
+  date = {1989},
+  related = {jha1989},
+  relatedtype = {suppto},
+  pages = {S61-S72},
+  bookpagination = {page}}
+@periodical{jha1989,
+  title = {Journal for the History of Astronomy},
+  volume = {20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+
+\section{Articles that span multiple issues}
+
+\tip{Use the key \code{serialarticle} as the \code{relatedtype}.}
+
+
+
+\section{Accepted journal articles, pre-publication}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{to be published in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Year.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{briscoe2008esp}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{briscoe2008esp,
+  author = {Robert Briscoe},
+  title = {Egocentric Spatial Representation in Action and Perception},
+  journaltitle = {Philosophy and Phenomenological Research},
+  url = {http://cogprints.org/5780/1/ECSRAP.F07.pdf},
+  pubstate = {inpress}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Reviews}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.4>
+{dean1995rpb}
+J. Dean, review of Philippe Basiron, \emph{My Early Life} (Bourges, 1994), in \emph{Res facta}, 17 (1995), 56--9.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@review{dean1995rpb,
+  author = {J. Dean},
+  related = {basiron1994mel},
+  relatedtype = {reviewof},
+  journaltitle = {Res facta},
+  volume = {17},
+  date = {1995},
+  pages = {56-59}}
+@book{basiron1994mel,
+  author = {Philippe Basiron},
+  title = {My Early Life},
+  location = {Bourges},
+  date = {1994}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.4.4>
+{jocelyn1989pav}
+H. D. Jocelyn, \enquote{Probus and Virgil}, review of Maria Luisa Delvigo, \emph{Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta} (Pisa, 1987), in \emph{CR}, \textsc{ns} 39 (1989), 27--8.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@review{jocelyn1989pav,
+  author = {H. D. Jocelyn},
+  title = {Probus and Virgil},
+  related = {delvigo1987tvt},
+  relatedtype = {reviewof},
+  journaltitle = {CR},
+  series = {newseries},
+  volume = {39},
+  date = {1989},
+  pages = {27-28}}
+@book{delvigo1987tvt,
+  author = {Maria Luisa Delvigo},
+  title = {Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta},
+  location = {Pisa},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Books}\label{sec:book}
+\chapterprecis{book, mvbook, collection, mvcollection, reference, mvreference}
+
+\section{Monographs}
+
+Biblatex defines \code{book} as a monograph, written either by a single author, or by several authors who have joint responsibility for the entire work. An editor in this context has a modest role selecting or annotating the content, and therefore in Oxford style is given after the title even if the author is not given.
+
+\subsection{Basic form}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{eliot1977m}
+George Eliot, \emph{Middlemarch} (New York: W. W. Norton, 1977).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{eliot1977m,
+  author = {George Eliot},
+  title = {Middlemarch},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {W. W. Norton},
+  date = {1977}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.2>
+{benvenuti1986op}
+Antonia Tissoni Benvenuti, \emph{L'\emph{Orfeo} del Poliziano} (Padua: Editrice Antenore, 1986).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{benvenuti1986op,
+  author = {Antonia Tissoni Benvenuti},
+  title = {L'\emph{Orfeo} del Poliziano},
+  location = {Padua},
+  publisher = {Editrice Antenore},
+  date = {1986}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.2>
+{oconor1977sjf}
+Roderick O'Conor, \emph{A Sentimental Journal through \enquote{Finnegan's Wake}, with a Map of the Liffey} (Dublin: HCE Press, 1977).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{oconor1977sjf,
+  author = {Roderick O'Conor},
+  title = {A Sentimental Journal through \enquote{Finnegan's Wake}, with a Map of the {Liffey}},
+  location = {Dublin},
+  publisher = {HCE Press},
+  date = {1977}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\subsection{No publisher}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.1.3>
+{rogers1986tmp}
+C.~D.~Rogers, \emph{Tracing Missing Persons} (Manchester, 1986).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{rogers1986tmp,
+  author = {C. D. Rogers},
+  title = {Tracing Missing Persons},
+  location = {Manchester},
+  date = {1986}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\subsection{Edited book}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{boas.botschuyver1952dc}
+\emph{Distichia Catonis}, ed. Marcus Boas and Henricus Johannes Botschuyver (Amsterdam, 1952).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{boas.botschuyver1952dc,
+  title = {Distichia Catonis},
+  editor = {Marcus Boas and Henricus Johannes Botschuyver},
+  location = {Amsterdam},
+  date = {1952}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Collections}
+
+Biblatex defines \code{collection} as a book made up of multiple self-contained contributions from distinct authors. There is no overall author: use the regular \code{book} entry type for collections of a single author’s work. The editor in this case has a more active role and therefore comes before the title.
+
+\spec{Editor (\lit{ed.}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{stewart.etal1994mb}
+Rosemary Stewart et al. (eds.), \emph{Managing in Britain} (London, 1994).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@collection{stewart.etal1994mb,
+  editor = {Rosemary Stewart and Jean-Louis Barsoux and Alfred Kieser and Hans-Dieter Ganter and Peter Walgenbach},
+  title = {Managing in {Britain}},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1994}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+
+\section{Reference works}
+
+Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
+
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{fortenbaugh.etal1991tes}
+\emph{Theophrastus of Eresus: Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence}, ed. William W. Fortenbaugh et al., 2 vols. (Philosophia Antiqua, 54; Leiden, 1991).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvreference{fortenbaugh.etal1991tes,
+  title = {{Theophrastus} of {Eresus}},
+  subtitle = {Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence},
+  editor = {William W. Fortenbaugh and Pamela M Huby and Robert W. Sharples and Dimitri Gutas
+    and others},
+  volumes = {2},
+  series = {Philosophia Antiqua},
+  number = {54},
+  location = {Leiden},
+  date = {1991}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Multi-volume works}
+
+Biblatex provides additional entry types for multi-volume works: \code{mvbook}, \code{mvcollection} and \code{mvreference} respectively. These can be used to cite all the volumes at once, or just one volume from the set.
+
+\subsection{All volumes}
+
+Where all volumes were published consistently, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher, Year), VolNo. Pages.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\parencite[ii.~\mkcomprange{367-368}]%
+{straeten1867lmp}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.6>
+{straeten1867lmp}%
+Edmond Vander Straeten, \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, 8 vols. (Brussels, 1867--88).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{straeten1867lmp,
+    author = {Edmond {Vander Straeten}},
+    title = {La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle},
+    volumes = {8},
+    location = {Brussels},
+    date = {1867/1888}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the publisher changed between volumes, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher and Location: Publisher, Year–Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.6*>
+{ritter1838hap}
+Heinrich Ritter, \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. Alexander J. W. Morrison, 4~vols. (Oxford: Talboys and London: Bohn, 1838--46).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{ritter1838hap,
+  author = {Heinrich Ritter},
+  title = {The History of Ancient Philosophy},
+  translator = {Alexander J. W. Morrison},
+  volumes = {4},
+  location = {Oxford and London},
+  publisher = {Talboys and Bohn},
+  date = {1838/1846}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Style Manual}, the translator in the above reference
+  is in parentheses; this occurs in one other reference (\S15.2.2, Lawrence 1992),
+  but in many more does not (\S15.2.15, Bischoff 1990; \S15.8, Auden 1990;
+  all in \S13.11.1). I am therefore choosing to ignore this unnecessary
+  complication.}
+
+\tip{You can alternatively use the standard \textsf{biblatex} relation type \code{multivolume}. Note that this construction is not portable to \textsf{oxyear}\slash\textsf{oxalph}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.6*>
+{ritter1838hap1-3}
+Heinrich Ritter, \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. Alexander J. W. Morrison, 4~vols., i–iii (Oxford: Talboys, 1838–9), iv (London: Bohn, 1846).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{ritter1838hap1-3,
+  author = {Heinrich Ritter},
+  title = {The History of Ancient Philosophy},
+  translator = {Alexander J. W. Morrison},
+  volumes = {4},
+  volume = {1-3},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  publisher = {Talboys},
+  date = {1838/1839},
+  related = {ritter1838hap4},
+  relatedtype = {multivolume}}
+@mvbook{ritter1838hap4,
+  author = {Heinrich Ritter},
+  title = {The History of Ancient Philosophy},
+  translator = {Alexander J. W. Morrison},
+  volumes = {4},
+  volume = {4},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Bohn},
+  date = {1846}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{One volume from several}
+
+Where the volumes are merely numbered, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, do not use \code{maintitle}: put the title of the whole work in \code{title}.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\cite[367--368]{straeten1867lmp.ii}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.6>
+{straeten1867lmp.ii}
+Edmond Vander Straeten, \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, ii (Brussels, 1867--88).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{straeten1867lmp.ii,
+  author = {Edmond {Vander Straeten}},
+  title = {La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle},
+  volume = {2},
+  location = {Brussels},
+  date = {1867/1888}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title,
+and they were all published at once (more or less),
+the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use \code{title} for the volume title and \code{maintitle} for the whole work.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.2>
+{brady.etal1994hehsa}
+Thomas A. Brady, Jr., Heiko A. Oberman, and James D. Tracy (eds.), \emph{Handbook of European History, 1400–1600: Late Middle Ages, Renaissance and Reformation}, i: \emph{Structures and Assertions} (Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1994).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvcollection{brady.etal1994hehsa,
+  editor = {Brady, Jr., Thomas A. and Heiko A. Oberman and James D. Tracy},
+  maintitle = {Handbook of European History, 1400–1600},
+  mainsubtitle = {{Late} {Middle} {Ages,} {Renaissance} and {Reformation}},
+  volume = {1},
+  title = {Structures and Assertions},
+  location = {Leiden},
+  publisher = {E. J. Brill},
+  date = {1994}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\parencite[42-56]%
+  {ward.waller1932che}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.6>
+{ward.waller1932che}
+A. W. Ward and A. E. Waller (eds.), \emph{The Cambridge History of English Literature}, xii: \emph{The Nineteenth Century} (Cambridge: CUP, 1932).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvcollection{ward.waller1932che,
+  editor = {A. W. Ward and A. E. Waller},
+  maintitle = {The Cambridge History of English Literature},
+  volume = {12},
+  title = {The Nineteenth Century},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  publisher = {CUP},
+  date = {1932}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title,
+and there are many volumes spanning years and possibly publishers,
+the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{VolTitle}, [\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title] (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+
+\tip{To get this format, use \code{book} instead of \code{mvbook}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.7>
+{fischer1989asf}
+David Hackett Fischer, \emph{Albion’s Seed: Four British Folkways in America}, [vol.\ i of \emph{America: A Cultural History}] (New York: Oxford University Press, 1989).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{fischer1989asf,
+  author = {David Hackett Fischer},
+  title = {Albion’s Seed},
+  subtitle = {Four British Folkways in America},
+  volume = {1},
+  maintitle = {America},
+  mainsubtitle = {A Cultural History},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {Oxford University Press},
+  date = {1989}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Additions, translations, and revisions}
+
+Where works have significant introductions, forewords, afterwords, illustrations, etc.\ this may be noted as follows:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{with an} Addition \lit{by} Contributor (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.1>
+{twain1971cyk}
+Mark Twain, \emph{A Connecticut Yankee at King Arthur's Court}, with an introduction by Justin Kaplan (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1971).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{twain1971cyk,
+  author = {Mark Twain},
+  title = {A {Connecticut} Yankee at {King} {Arthur's} Court},
+  introduction = {Justin Kaplan},
+  location = {Harmondsworth},
+  publisher = {Penguin},
+  date = {1971}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Translators are credited as follows:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.} Translator(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.14>
+{bischoff1990lpa}
+Bernhard Bischoff, \emph{Latin Palaeography: Antiquity and the Middle Ages}, trans. Dáibhi Ó Cróinín and David Ganz (Cambridge, 1990).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{bischoff1990lpa,
+  author = {Bernhard Bischoff},
+  title = {Latin Palaeography},
+  subtitle = {Antiquity and the Middle Ages},
+  translator = {Dáibhi Ó Cróinín and David Ganz},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  date = {1990}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.\ with} Addition Translator(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.14>
+{martorell1984tlb}
+Joanat Martorell, \emph{Tirant lo Blanc}, trans. with foreword David H. Rosenthal (London, 1984).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{martorell1984tlb,
+  author = {Joanat Martorell},
+  title = {Tirant lo Blanc},
+  translator = {David H. Rosenthal},
+  foreword = {David H. Rosenthal},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1984}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Editions}
+
+\subsection{Later edition only}
+
+Where the author\slash editor is common to both, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\tip{This is the format used by the entry type \code{book}}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.3>
+{baker1990iel}
+J. H. Baker, \emph{An Introduction to English Legal History} (3rd edn., 1990).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{baker1990iel,
+  author = {J. H. Baker},
+  title = {An Introduction to {English} Legal History},
+  edition = {3},
+  date = {1990}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{beckford1823v}
+William Beckford, \emph{Vathek} (4th edn., London, 1823) [online facsimile], \url{http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{beckford1823v,
+  author = {William Beckford},
+  title = {Vathek},
+  edition = {4},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1823},
+  howpublished = {online facsimile},
+  url = {http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Where the editor has changed, the following form is used:
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, nth \lit{edn.}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\tip{This format is used by entry type \code{reference}}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.3>
+{knowles1999odq}
+\emph{The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations}, 5th edn., ed. Elizabeth Knowles (Oxford, 1999).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@reference{knowles1999odq,
+  title = {The {Oxford} Dictionary of Quotations},
+  edition = {5},
+  editor = {Elizabeth Knowles},
+  publisher = {Oxford},
+  date = {1999}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Both first and later edition}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Year; nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\tip{Use the \code{orig} fields for the earlier edition.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.3>
+{denniston1934gp}
+J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{denniston1934gp,
+  author = {J. D. Denniston},
+  title = {The Greek Particles},
+  origdate = {1934},
+  edition = {2},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1954}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get ‘revised edition’. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get ‘revised and enlarged edition’}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1*>
+{gibbon1686dfs}
+{[John Gibbon]}, \emph{Day-Fatality: Or Some Observations on Days Lucky and Unlucky}, (London, 1678; rev.~edn., 1686).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{gibbon1686dfs,
+  author = {John Gibbon},
+  author+an = {=inferred},
+  title = {Day-Fatality},
+  subtitle = {Or Some Observations on Days Lucky and Unlucky},
+  edition = {revised},
+  origlocation = {London},
+  origdate = {1678},
+  date = {1686}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.}
+
+\subsection{Republications}
+
+If the publication has not been revised, but has been re-typeset by a different publisher,
+the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests putting the original date in a note at the end,
+rather than within the publication block%
+.
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{originally pub.} Year).}
+
+\tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
+\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.3>
+{bettelheim1976uem}
+Bruno Bettelheim, \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales} (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1988) (first pub. 1976).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{bettelheim1976uem,
+  author = {Bruno Bettelheim},
+  title = {The Uses of Enchantment},
+  subtitle = {The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales},
+  location = {Harmondsworth},
+  publisher = {Penguin Books},
+  date = {1988},
+  origdate = {1976}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Reprints}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.4>
+{adam.tannery1897odd}
+C. Adam and D. Tannery (eds.), \emph{Œuvres de Descartes} (Paris: Cerf, 1897--1913; repr. Paris: J. Vrin, CNRS, 1964--76).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@collection{adam.tannery1897odd,
+  editor = {C. Adam and D. Tannery},
+  title = {Œuvres de Descartes},
+  origlocation = {Paris},
+  origpublisher = {Cerf},
+  origdate = {1897/1913},
+  edition = {reprint},
+  location = {Paris},
+  publisher = {J. Vrin, CNRS},
+  date = {1964/1976}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.4>
+{southern1991sap}
+R. W. Southern, \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. repr., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{southern1991sap,
+  author = {R. W. Southern},
+  title = {Saint Anselm},
+  subtitle = {A Portrait in a Landscape},
+  edition = {revisedreprint},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  publisher = {Cambridge University Press},
+  date = {1991}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.4>
+{allen1594kkk}
+E. Allen, \emph{A Knack to Know a Knave} (London, 1594; facs. edn., Oxford: Malone Society Reprints, 1963).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{allen1594kkk,
+  author = {E. Allen},
+  title = {A Knack to Know a Knave},
+  origlocation = {London},
+  origdate = {1594},
+  edition = {facsimile},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  publisher = {Malone Society Reprints},
+  date = {1963}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Title changes}
+
+\emph{New Hart's Rules} recommends giving the original publication details first,
+then the new title and its details after a semicolon.
+
+\tip{The standard \code{relatedtype} value \code{reprintas} is supported.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.13>
+{hare1949wwb}
+Cyril Hare, \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London, 1949); repr. as \emph{The Wind Blows Death} (London, 1987).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{hare1949wwb,
+  author = {Cyril Hare},
+  title = {When the Wind Blows},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1949},
+  related = {hare1987wbd},
+  relatedtype = {reprintas}}
+@book{hare1987wbd,
+  author = {Cyril Hare},
+  title = {The Wind Blows Death},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{A more generalized version of this relation is available.
+  If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas},
+  the edition and any editorial contributions will be printed in the linking text.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.12*>
+{berkenhout1769onh}
+John Berkenhout, \emph{Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 3 vols. (London, 1769–72); rev. edn., as \emph{A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 2 vols. (London, 1789).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{berkenhout1769onh,
+  author = {John Berkenhout},
+  title = {Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain},
+  volumes = {3},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1769/1772},
+  related = {berkenhout1789snh},
+  relatedtype = {editedas}}
+@mvbook{berkenhout1789snh,
+  author = {John Berkenhout},
+  title = {A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain},
+  volumes = {2},
+  edition = {revised},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1789}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.13>
+{lower1665dtw}
+Richard Lower, \emph{Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.} (London, 1665); facs. edn. with introduction, ed. and trans. Kenneth Dewhurst, as \emph{Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}: A Defence of the Experimental Method} (Oxford, 1983).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{lower1665dtw,
+  author = {Richard Lower},
+  title = {Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus
+    Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1665},
+  related = {dewhurst1983rlv},
+  relatedtype = {editedas}}
+@book{dewhurst1983rlv,
+  author = {Richard Lower},
+  introduction = {Kenneth Dewhurst},
+  editor = {Kenneth Dewhurst},
+  translator = {Kenneth Dewhurst},
+  title = {Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}},
+  subtitle = {A Defence of the Experimental Method},
+  edition = {facsimile},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1983}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Co-publications\slash co-editions}
+
+If the work is published under two different titles, it is a good idea to
+provide both to make it easier to locate.
+
+\tip{Use a generic relation and specify the country details in the \code{relatedstring}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.5>
+{salinger1953ns}
+J. D. Salinger, \emph{Nine Stories} (Boston: Little, Brown, 1953), published in the UK as \emph{For Esmé---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories} (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1953).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{salinger1953ns,
+  author = {J. D. Salinger},
+  title = {Nine Stories},
+  location = {Boston},
+  publisher = {Little, Brown},
+  date = {1953},
+  related = {salinger1953few},
+  relatedstring = {published in the UK as},
+  options = {relationpunct=comma}}
+@book{salinger1953few,
+  title = {For {Esmé}---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Hamish Hamilton},
+  date = {1953}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Works from a series}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Series; Location: Publisher, Year).}
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.7>
+{garlandia1972dmm}
+Johannes de Garlandia, \emph{De mensurabili musica}, ed. Erich Reimer, 2 vols. (Beihefte zum Archiv für Musikwissenschaft, 10--11; Wiesbaden, 1972).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{garlandia1972dmm,
+  author = {Johannes de Garlandia},
+  title = {De mensurabili musica},
+  editor = {Erich Reimer},
+  volumes = {2},
+  series = {Beihefte zum Archiv für Musikwissenschaft},
+  number = {10--11},
+  publisher = {Wiesbaden},
+  date = {1972}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (nth \lit{ser.}, Year).}
+
+\section{Pre-publication book}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, \lit{forthcoming}).}
+
+
+\chapter{Works within books}\label{sec:inbook}
+\chapterprecis{inbook, bookinbook, suppbook, incollection, suppcollection, inreference}
+
+\section{Works in collections of a single author's works}
+
+The \code{inbook} entry type is intended for books that consist of several self-contained works by the same author, for citing one of these works.
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.}, \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+
+\tip{If you provide \code{bookauthor}, and it is the same as the \code{author}, the second instance of the name will replaced by \enquote{id.}\slash \enquote{ead.}\slash \enquote{eid.}\slash \enquote{eaed.} Use the \code{gender} field to select which is used.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.11*>
+{kristeller1979thm}
+Paul Oskar Kristeller, \enquote{The Aristotelian Tradition}, in id., \emph{Renaissance Thought and Its Sources}, ed. Michael Mooney (New York: Columbia University Press, 1979).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inbook{kristeller1979thm,
+  author = {Paul Oskar Kristeller},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {The Aristotelian Tradition},
+  bookauthor = {Paul Oskar Kristeller},
+  booktitle = {Renaissance Thought and Its Sources},
+  editor = {Michael Mooney},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {Columbia University Press},
+  date = {1979}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.6*>
+{ashton1991d}
+John Ashton, \enquote{Dualism}, in \emph{Understanding the Fourth Gospel} (Oxford, 1991), 205–37.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inbook{ashton1991d,
+  author = {John Ashton},
+  title = {Dualism},
+  booktitle = {Understanding the Fourth Gospel},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1991},
+  pages = {205-237}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Works in collections}
+
+The \code{incollection} entry type is intended for citing one of a collection of self-contained works by different authors.
+
+\subsection{Works in a mixed collection}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} Editors (\lit{eds.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.3>
+{shearman1993vsf}
+John Shearman, \enquote{The Vatican Stanze: Functions and Decoration}, in George Holmes (ed.), \emph{Art and Politics in Renaissance Italy: British Academy Lectures} (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1993), 185--240.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@incollection{shearman1993vsf,
+  author = {John Shearman},
+  title = {The Vatican Stanze},
+  subtitle = {Functions and Decoration},
+  editor = {George Holmes},
+  booktitle = {Art and Politics in Renaissance Italy},
+  booksubtitle = {British Academy Lectures},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  publisher = {Clarendon Press},
+  date = {1993},
+  pages = {185-240}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\subsection{Works by the editor in a mixed collection}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.} (\lit{ed.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.}
+
+\tip{If you provide the same values for \code{author} and \code{editor}, the editor name will replaced by \enquote{id.}\slash \enquote{ead.}\slash \enquote{eid.}\slash \enquote{eaed.} Use the \code{gender} field to select which is used.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3>
+{todd1974dhp}
+W. B. Todd, \enquote{David Hume: A Preliminary Bibliography}, in id. (ed.), \emph{Hume and the Enlightenment: Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner} (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1974).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@incollection{todd1974dhp,
+  author = {W. B. Todd},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {David Hume},
+  subtitle = {A Preliminary Bibliography},
+  editor = {W. B. Todd},
+  booktitle = {Hume and the Enlightenment},
+  booksubtitle = {Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner},
+  location = {Edinburgh},
+  publisher = {Edinburgh University Press},
+  date = {1974}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Anthologies of independently published works}
+
+Biblatex provides the \code{bookinbook} entry type for citing a part of an anthology that has previously been published as a book in its own right. The main difference from \code{inbook} is how the original publication information is handled.
+
+\subsection{Later version more accessible}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} to give the date of original publication.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3>
+{frege1892osr}
+G. Frege, \enquote{On Sense and Reference}, in id., \emph{Philosophical Writings}, trans. and ed. P. T. Geach and M. Black (Oxford: Blackwell, 1952) (originally pub. 1892).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@bookinbook{frege1892osr,
+  author = {G. Frege},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {On Sense and Reference},
+  bookauthor = {G. Frege},
+  booktitle = {Philosophical Writings},
+  translator = {P. T. Geach and M. Black},
+  editor = {P. T. Geach and M. Black},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  publisher = {Blackwell},
+  date = {1952},
+  origdate = {1892}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Both versions equally accessible}
+
+\tip{Put the key of the original work in \code{related}, and in \code{relatedtype} use the keyword \code{reprintfrom}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3>
+{owen1986pi}
+G. E. L. Owen, \enquote{Philosophical Invective}, in id., \emph{Logic, Science and Dialectic}, ed. M. Nussbaum (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1986), 347--64. From \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, 1 (1983), 1--25.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@bookinbook{owen1986pi,
+  author = {G. E. L. Owen},
+  gender = {sm},
+  title = {Philosophical Invective},
+  booktitle = {Logic, Science and Dialectic},
+  bookauthor = {G. E. L. Owen},
+  editor = {M. Nussbaum},
+  location = {Ithaca, NY},
+  publisher = {Cornell University Press},
+  date = {1986},
+  pages = {347-364},
+  related = {owen1983pi},
+  relatedtype = {reprintfrom}}
+@article{owen1983pi,
+  author = {G. E. L. Owen},
+  title = {Philosophical Invective},
+  journaltitle = {Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy},
+  volume = {1},
+  date = {1983},
+  pages = {1-25}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Articles in yearbooks and works of reference}
+
+Yearbooks may be treated either as collections or periodicals; the distinction boils down to whether you want to print the location and publisher.
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and encyclopaedias using a postnote like \code{[s.v.\@ `Tawdry']}, but for online works gives a format rather similar to yearbooks, that is, without \enquote{in}.
+
+\tip{To omit the \enquote{in} before the book title, either use the \code{inreference} entry type without specifying an editor, or use the \code{incollection} type with an \code{entrysubtype} of \code{yearbook}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.3>
+{dahlhaus1971mmf}
+Carl Dahlhaus, \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emph{Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz, 1970} (Berlin, 1971), 21–33.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inreference{dahlhaus1971mmf,
+  author = {Carl Dahlhaus},
+  title = {Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts},
+  booktitle = {Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz,
+    1970},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  date = {1971},
+  pages = {21-33}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.6*>
+{gill1987intro}
+Roma Gill, introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (Oxford, 1987; repr.\@ 2001).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppbook{gill1987intro,
+  author = {Roma Gill},
+  title = {introduction},
+  booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
+  volume = {1},
+  origlocation = {Oxford},
+  origdate = {1987},
+  edition = {reprint},
+  date = {2001}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
+\chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
+
+\section{Single volume proceedings}
+
+The \code{proceedings} entry type is intended for a set of conference papers that have been collected together into a single volume.
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.12>
+{icp1975pic}
+\emph{Proceedings of the XIV International Congress of Papyrologists: Oxford, 24--31 July 1974} (London, 1975).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{icp1975pic,
+  title = {Proceedings of the {XIV} {International} {Congress} of {Papyrologists}},
+  subtitle = {{Oxford}, 24--31 {July} 1974},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1975}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{The \code{organization} is automatically converted into an \code{author}.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[1.52-3]{iau1922tia}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.13>
+{iau1922tia}
+International Astronomical Union, \emph{Transactions of the International Astronomical Union, Rome}, 12--20 May 1922 (London: Imperial College Bookstall, 1922).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{iau1922tia,
+  organization = {{International Astronomical Union}},
+  title = {Transactions of the {International} {Astronomical} {Union}, {Rome}},
+  eventdate = {1922-05-12/1922-05-20},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Imperial College Bookstall},
+  date = {1922}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Sometimes the title of the proceedings does not relate to the conference; in which case the following form might be used:
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ecdl2009}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{ecdl2009,
+  editor = {Maristella Agosti and José Borbinha and Sarantos Kapidakis and Christos
+    Papatheodorou and Giannis Tsakonas},
+  title = {Research and Advanced Technology for Digital Libraries},
+  eventtitle = {13th European Conference, ECDL 2009},
+  venue = {Corfu, Greece},
+  eventdate = {2009-09-27/2009-10-02},
+  series = {Lecture Notes in Computer Science},
+  number = {5714},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  publisher = {Springer},
+  date = {2009}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Multi-volume proceedings}
+
+\textsf{Biblatex} provides \code{mvproceedings} for multi-volume proceedings.
+The examples here are a combination of Oxford style for proceedings and multi-volume books.
+
+\subsection{All volumes}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{iced2009}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvproceedings{iced2009,
+  title = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)},
+  volumes = {10},
+  editor = {Margareta Norell Bergendahl and Martin Grimheden and Larry Leifer},
+  venue = {Stanford, CA},
+  eventdate = {2009-08-24/2009-08-27},
+  location = {Glasgow},
+  publisher = {Design Society},
+  date = {2009},
+  isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{One volume}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{iced2009dik}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvproceedings{iced2009dik,
+  maintitle = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)},
+  title = {Design Information and Knowledge},
+  volume = {8},
+  editor = {Margareta Norell Bergendahl and Martin Grimheden and Larry Leifer},
+  venue = {Stanford, CA},
+  eventdate = {2009-08-24/2009-08-27},
+  location = {Glasgow},
+  publisher = {Design Society},
+  date = {2009},
+  isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Published conference paper}
+
+The \code{inproceedings} entry type is intended for a conference paper published as part of a proceedings volume. For papers that have not been collected into a proceedings volume, or presentation slide sets, use the \code{unpublished} entry type instead (see below).
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{tonkin.strelnikov2009iem}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inproceedings{tonkin.strelnikov2009iem,
+  author = {Emma Tonkin and Alexey Strelnikov},
+  title = {Information Environment Metadata Schema Registry},
+  editor = {Maristella Agosti and José Borbinha and Sarantos Kapidakis and Christos Papatheodorou and Giannis Tsakonas},
+  booktitle = {Research and Advanced Technology for Digital Libraries},
+  eventtitle = {13th European Conference, ECDL 2009},
+  venue = {Corfu, Greece},
+  eventdate = {2009-09-27/2009-10-02},
+  series = {Lecture Notes in Computer Science},
+  number = {5714},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  publisher = {Springer},
+  date = {2009},
+  pages = {487-488},
+  isbn = {978-3-642-04345-1},
+  issn = {0302-9743}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year), VolNo. Pages.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ding.etal2009sfc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inproceedings{ding.etal2009sfc,
+  author = {Lian Ding and Alex Ball and Manjula Patel and Jason Matthews and Glen Mullineux},
+  title = {Strategies for the Collaborative Use of CAD Product Models},
+  maintitle = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)},
+  booktitle = {Design Information and Knowledge},
+  volume = {8},
+  editor = {Margareta Norell Bergendahl and Martin Grimheden and Larry Leifer},
+  venue = {Stanford, CA},
+  eventdate = {2009-08-24/2009-08-27},
+  location = {Glasgow},
+  publisher = {Design Society},
+  date = {2009},
+  pages = {123-134},
+  isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4},
+  url = {http://opus.bath.ac.uk/14285}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Published orations, addresses, lectures, and speeches}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Type, Venue, Date (Location: Publisher, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.6>
+{gombrich1957as}
+E. H. Gombrich, \emph{Art and Scholarship}, Inaugural Lecture, University College London, 14 Feb. 1957 (London: H. K. Lewis, 1957).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@proceedings{gombrich1957as,
+  author = {E. H. Gombrich},
+  title = {Art and Scholarship},
+  eventtitle = {Inaugural Lecture},
+  venue = {University College London},
+  eventdate = {1957-02-14},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {H. K. Lewis},
+  date = {1957}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the \texttt{eventtitle} field to indicate the type of the oration.}
+
+\section{Unpublished conference paper}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{paper given at the} ConfTitle, Venue, EventDate.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.6>
+{holfordstrevens1999hlm}
+Leofranc Holford-Strevens, \enquote{Humanism and the Language of Music Theory Treatises}, paper given at the 65th Annual Meeting of the American Musicological Society, Kansas City, MO, 4--7 Nov. 1999.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@unpublished{holfordstrevens1999hlm,
+  author = {Leofranc Holford-Strevens},
+  title = {Humanism and the Language of Music Theory Treatises},
+  howpublished = {paper given at the 65th Annual Meeting of the American Musicological Society},
+  location = {Kansas City, MO},
+  date = {1999-11-04/1999-11-07}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Unpublished orations, addresses, lectures, and speeches}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Description.}
+
+
+\chapter{Grey literature}\label{sec:report}
+\chapterprecis{booklet, manual, patent, report, thesis, standard}
+
+\section{One-off reports}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Institution, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.2.13>
+{botswana1980hdr}
+Government of Botswana, \emph{A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana} (Gabarone: Ministry of Local Government and Lands, 1980).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{botswana1980hdr,
+  author = {{Government of Botswana}},
+  title = {A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana},
+  location = {Gabarone},
+  institution = {Ministry of Local Government and Lands},
+  date = {1980}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If the report does not specify an author, give the publishing institution in the \texttt{author} field.
+  Some examples in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} repeat the institution in the publisher slot
+  (i.e.\@ the \texttt{institution} field) and some do not.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.13>
+{pac1988upt}
+Penal Affairs Consortium, \emph{An Unsuitable Place for Treatment: Diverting Mentally Disordered Offenders from Custody} (London, 1988).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{pac1988upt,
+  author = {{Penal Affairs Consortium}},
+  title = {An Unsuitable Place for Treatment},
+  subtitle = {Diverting Mentally Disordered Offenders from Custody},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1988}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{unesco2012unw}
+UNESCO, \emph{The United Nations World Water Development Report 4}, vol. 1: \emph{Managing Water under Uncertainty and Risk} (Paris: UNESCO, 2012), \url{http://unesdoc.unesco.org/images/0021/002156/215644e.pdf}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{unesco2012unw,
+  author = {UNESCO},
+  maintitle = {The United Nations World Water Development Report 4},
+  volume = {1},
+  title = {Managing Water under Uncertainty and Risk},
+  location = {Paris},
+  institution = {UNESCO},
+  date = {2012},
+  url = {http://unesdoc.unesco.org/images/0021/002156/215644e.pdf},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Reports with a type or series}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+
+
+\section{Theses}
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.5.1>
+{blackburn1970tlp}
+Bonnie J. Blackburn, \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chicago, 1970).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@thesis{blackburn1970tlp,
+  author = {Bonnie J. Blackburn},
+  title = {The Lupus Problem},
+  type = {Ph.D. diss.},
+  institution = {University of Chicago},
+  date = {1970}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).}
+
+\chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
+\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+
+There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
+
+\section{Audio recordings}
+
+The basic structure of audio recording entries is as follows:
+
+\spec{Composer, \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].}
+
+If the composer's name is not of interest, it may be omitted or replaced by the artist's name.
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} to specify the date of recording. If you want it to be introduced by something other than the localized string \enquote{recorded}, use the (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} field%
+.}
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording company:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+  a simple label name – e.g.\@ \enquote{Columbia}, \enquote{Hyperion}, \enquote{Archiv} – followed immediately by the type or number
+\item
+  a label name separated from the number by a comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Valois,}
+  \enquote{EMI Electrola,} \enquote{EMI Blues Series,}
+\item
+  a compiling organization, semicolon, publishing company, no comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Smithsonian Institution; Columbia}
+\item
+  a publishing company, colon, label name, comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Decca Record Company, Ltd.: Éditions de l'Oiseau-lyre,}
+\item
+  a publishing company, comma, location, comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Christophorus-Verlag Herder, Freiburg im Breisgau,}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to.
+
+\tip{To get the normal format, put the label name in \code{publisher}, the type of release (e.g.\@ compact disc, audio cassette) in \code{type}, and the catalogue number in \code{number}. In the examples from \emph{New Hart's Rules}, the type is uniformly omitted.}
+
+\tip{To put a comma between the label and the type\slash number, put the label name in \code{series} instead.}
+
+\tip{If you provide both a \code{publisher} and a \code{series}, they will be separated by \cs{recordseriespunct}, which is initially set to \cs{addcomma}\cs{space}. You could set it to \cs{addcolon}\cs{space} instead to match the example.}
+
+\tip{If the compiling organization is distinct from the publisher, put the former in \code{origpublisher}; it will be separated from the publisher by a semicolon.}
+
+\tip{Contrary to the OGS example, but in common with other entry types, the location if provided will be printed before the publisher, separated from it by a colon. (This is why a comma is the default for \cs{recordseriespunct}.) In the absence of a publisher it will be followed by a comma.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2*>
+{carter1991fsq}
+Elliott Carter, \emph{The Four String Quartets}, Juilliard String Quartet (Sony S2K 47229, 1991).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{carter1991fsq,
+  author = {Elliott Carter},
+  title = {The Four String Quartets},
+  editor = {{Juilliard String Quartet}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  publisher = {Sony},
+  number = {S2K 47229},
+  date = {1991}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1>
+{hillier1989p}
+Paul Hillier, \emph{Proensa} (ECM Records compact disc ECM 1368, 1989).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{hillier1989p,
+  author = {Paul Hillier},
+  title = {Proensa},
+  publisher = {ECM Records},
+  type = {compact disc},
+  number = {ECM 1368},
+  date = {1989}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1>
+{couperin1970pdc}
+Francois Couperin, \emph{Pièces de clavecin: Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième ordres}, Huguette Dreyfus (Valois, MB 797, 1970).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{couperin1970pdc,
+  author = {Francois Couperin},
+  title = {Pièces de clavecin},
+  subtitle = {Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième
+    ordres},
+  editor = {Huguette Dreyfus},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  series = {Valois},
+  number = {MB 797},
+  date = {1970}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1>
+{pageNDmn}
+\emph{The Mirror of Narcissus: Songs by Guillaume de Machaut}, Gothic Voices, dir. Christopher Page (Hyperion compact disc CDA 66087).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{pageNDmn,
+  title = {The Mirror of Narcissus},
+  subtitle = {Songs by Guillaume do Machaut},
+  editor = {{Gothic Voices}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Christopher Page},
+  editoratype = {director},
+  publisher = {Hyperion},
+  type = {compact disc},
+  number = {CDA 66087}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{To describe the medium in a separate note, use the \texttt{howpublished} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2>
+{hopkinsNDcar}
+Lightnin' Hopkins, \emph{The Complete Aladdin Recordings} (EMI Blues Series, CDP-7-96843-2) [2-vol.\@ CD set].
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@music{hopkinsNDcar,
+  author = {{Lightnin’ Hopkins}},
+  title = {The Complete Aladdin Recordings},
+  series = {EMI Blues Series},
+  number = {CDP-7-96843-2},
+  howpublished = {2-vol.\@ CD set}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{To describe the medium as part of the publication statement, use the \texttt{type} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.1>
+{lewis1981lww}
+C. S. Lewis, \emph{The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe}, read by Sir Michael Hordern (2 audio cassettes, TO1611, 1981).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{lewis1981lww,
+  author = {C. S. Lewis},
+  title = {The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe},
+  editor = {title=Sir, given=Michael, family=Hordern},
+  editortype = {reader},
+  type = {2 audio cassettes},
+  number = {TO1611},
+  date = {1981}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Combination releases}
+
+Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving it an overall title.
+
+\tip{Put the subsequent composer\slash title combinations in new entries, and relate them with a \code{relatedtype} of \code{includes}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2*>
+{dutilleux1987as}
+Henri Dutilleux, \emph{L'Arbre des songes}, and Peter Maxwell Davies, \emph{Concerto for Violin and Orchestra}, Royal Philharmonic Orchestra, cond. André Previn, violin Isaac Stern (CBS MK 42449, 1987).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{dutilleux1987as,
+  author = {Henri Dutilleux},
+  title = {L'Arbre des songes},
+  related = {maxwelldavies1987},
+  relatedtype = {includes},
+  editor = {{Royal Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {André Previn},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  editorb = {Isaac Stern},
+  editorbtype = {violin},
+  publisher = {CBS},
+  number = {MK 42449},
+  date = {1987}}
+@audio{maxwelldavies1987,
+  author = {Maxwell Davies, Peter},
+  title = {Concerto for Violin and Orchestra},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\hack{Only the primary work will show up in citations; the subsequent ones will not.
+  If this is not what you want, you will need to use \code{shortauthor}\slash\code{shorttitle} or \code{shorthand}, or build up the citation manually with \cs{citeauthor} and the like.}
+
+\info{Depending on the thrust of your document, you could remove the complication by shifting the composers into the title and putting the performers in the author position.}
+
+\info{If you are only interested in one of the works in the release, you might be better off using the \code{inaudio} entry type instead (see below).}
+
+\subsection{Tracks from an album}
+
+\tip{Use the non-standard entry types \code{inaudio} or \code{inmusic} to reference a single work within an album. Use \code{booktitle} (somewhat loosely) for the album title.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.2*>
+{davis1997sw}
+Miles Davis et al., \enquote{So What}, in \emph{Kind of Blue}, rec. 1959 (Columbia CK 64935, 1997) [CD].
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@inaudio{davis1997sw,
+  author = {Miles Davis and others},
+  title = {So What},
+  booktitle = {Kind of Blue},
+  origdate = {1959},
+  origdatetype = {rec\adddot},
+  publisher = {Columbia},
+  number = {CK 64935},
+  date = {1997},
+  howpublished = {CD}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{Note the use of \code{origdate} for the date of recording in this example.}
+
+\section{Video recordings}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year).}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2>
+{bbc1987ava}
+\emph{The Ashes: Victory in Australia} (BBCV 4040, 1987).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{bbc1987ava,
+  title = {The {Ashes}},
+  subtitle = {Victory in {Australia}},
+  publisher = {BBCV},
+  number = {4040},
+  date = {1987}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle} \lit{series} (Publisher, Number, Year).}
+
+\tip{For an episode in a series, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{episode} and put the series name in \code{maintitle}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2>
+{britt1986pho}
+\enquote{Percy and Harold and Other Stories}, \emph{Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends} series (Britt Allcroft 5-014861-100224, 1986).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{britt1986pho,
+  entrysubtype = {episode},
+  title = {{Percy} and {Harold} and Other Stories},
+  maintitle = {Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends \textup{series}},
+  publisher = {Britt Allcroft},
+  number = {5-014861-100224},
+  date = {1986}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{Director (\lit{dir.}), \emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year).}
+
+\tip{Use the \texttt{author} field to place a credit at the head of the reference.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2>
+{chaplin1936mt}
+Charles Chaplin (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists, 1936).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@movie{chaplin1936mt,
+  author = {Charles Chaplin},
+  authortype = {director},
+  title = {Modern Times},
+  publisher = {United Artists},
+  date = {1936}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{dir.} Director (Publisher, Number, Year).}
+
+\tip{Use the \texttt{editor} field to place a credit after the title.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2>
+{reiner1983tst}
+\emph{This is Spinal Tap: A Rockumentary by Marti Di Bergi}, dir.\ Rob Reiner (Embassy Pictures, 1983).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@movie{reiner1983tst,
+  title = {This is {Spinal} {Tap}},
+  subtitle = {A Rockumentary by {Marti} {Di} {Bergi}},
+  editor = {Rob Reiner},
+  editortype = {director},
+  publisher = {Embassy Pictures},
+  date = {1983}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year), Credit.}
+
+\tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
+  If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
+  You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.2>
+{kaurismaki1989lcg}
+\emph{Leningrad Cowboys Go America} (Villealfa Filmproductions, 1989), dir.\@ and screenplay by Aki Kaurismäki, story by Sakke Järvenpää, Aki Kaurismäki, Mato Valtonen.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@movie{kaurismaki1989lcg,
+  title = {Leningrad Cowboys Go America},
+  publisher = {Villealfa Filmproductions},
+  date = {1989},
+  editortype = {dir.\ and screenplay by},
+  editor = {Aki Kaurismäki},
+  editoratype = {story by},
+  editora = {Sakke Järvenpää and Aki Kaurismäki and Mato Valtonen},
+  options = {endeditor}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{For an online video, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{clip}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{bbc2013iim}
+BBC News, \enquote{Inside India's Mars Mission HQ} [video] (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{bbc2013iim,
+  entrysubtype = {clip},
+  author = {{BBC News}},
+  title = {Inside India's Mars Mission HQ},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{rubinstein1956rpc}
+Arthur Rubinstein, \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)} [video], YouTube (recorded 9 Jan. 1956, uploaded 8 Nov. 2011), \url{http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{rubinstein1956rpc,
+  entrysubtype = {clip},
+  author = {Arthur Rubinstein},
+  title = {Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)},
+  organization = {YouTube},
+  origdate = {1956-01-09},
+  date = {2011-11-08},
+  datetype = {uploaded},
+  url = {http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use \texttt{origdate} and, if necessary, the (non-standard) \texttt{origdatetype} field to specify the date of recording or original broadcast. Use the (non-standard) \texttt{datetype} field to clarify the event represented by the publication date.}
+
+\section{Broadcasts}\label{sec:broadcasts}
+
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} sides with the latter.
+
+\spec{\emph{Title}, Channel (Location, Date, Time).}
+
+\tip{Put the channel in the \code{organization} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.14.3*>
+{canal2001ch}
+\emph{Un Cœur in Hiver}, Canal+ (Paris, 15 May 2001, 11.40 p.m.).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{canal2001ch,
+  title = {Un Cœur in Hiver},
+  organization = {Canal+},
+  location = {Paris},
+  date = {2001-05-15T23:40:00+02:00}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.}
+
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{berger1972ws}
+John Berger, Episode 1, \emph{Ways of Seeing}, BBC (1972), \url{https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{berger1972ws,
+  entrysubtype = {episode},
+  author = {John Berger},
+  title = {Episode 1},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  maintitle = {Ways of Seeing},
+  organization = {BBC},
+  date = {1972},
+  url = {https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Podcasts, video podcasts and webcasts}
+
+\tip{Set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{podcast} for a podcast.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.7.3>
+{weldon2010did}
+Fay Weldon, interview with Kirsty Young, \emph{Desert Island Discs Archive} [podcast], BBC Radio 4 (9 May 2010), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{weldon2010did,
+  entrysubtype = {podcast},
+  author = {Fay Weldon},
+  descriptor = {interview with {Kirsty Young}},
+  maintitle = {Desert Island Discs Archive},
+  organization = {BBC Radio 4},
+  date = {2010-05-09},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*>
+{perry2013ifm}
+Grayson Perry, \enquote{I Found Myself in the Art World} [podcast], Reith Lecture, BBC Radio 4  (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@audio{perry2013ifm,
+  entrysubtype = {podcast},
+  author = {Grayson Perry},
+  title = {I Found Myself in the Art World},
+  note = {Reith Lecture},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  organization = {BBC Radio 4},
+  url = {http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{I am not sure why \emph{New Hart's Rules} places the channel after the date in the above case; it is probably a mistake or an odd variation, so I have adjusted it for consistency.}
+
+\tip{As for other online videos, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{clip} for a video podcast.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*>
+{nicholson2011qsm}
+Christie Nicholson, \enquote{A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style} [video], \emph{Scientific American} (17 Dec. 2011), \url{http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17}, accessed 4 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{nicholson2011qsm,
+  entrysubtype = {clip},
+  author = {Christie Nicholson},
+  title = {A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style},
+  organization = {\emph{Scientific American}},
+  date = {2011-12-17},
+  url = {http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17},
+  urldate = {2013-11-04}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{The above is actually an episode of the audio podcast \emph{60-Second Mind} (which would be the \code{maintitle}).
+  \emph{Scientific American} is in this instance the \code{organization} that is hosting it, but because it is also the name of a journal, it has been manually formatted to match.}
+
+\tip{Perhaps a better way of achieiving consistency in this case would be to treat it like an article, and clarify the medium (i.e.\@ video, erroneously) using the \texttt{titleaddon} field.}
+
+\tip{Set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{webcast} for a webcast.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*>
+{yousafzai2013mwa}
+Malala Yousafzai, \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013} [webcast], UN Web TV (12 July 2013), \url{http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala}, accessed 15 Feb. 2015.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@video{yousafzai2013mwa,
+  entrysubtype = {webcast},
+  author = {Malala Yousafzai},
+  title = {Making a Wish for Action on Global Education},
+  subtitle = {Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013},
+  organization = {UN Web TV},
+  date = {2013-07-12},
+  url = {http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala},
+  urldate = {2015-02-15}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Images}
+
+\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{clarkeNDeci}
+M. Clarke, \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery, \url{http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@image{clarkeNDeci,
+  author = {M. Clarke},
+  title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
+  titleaddon = {poster},
+  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{ibwNDcgs}
+\enquote{Christ the Good Shepherd}, stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys, Imaging the Bible in Wales Database, \url{http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884}, accessed 10 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@image{ibwNDcgs,
+  title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
+  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
+  url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
+  urldate = {2013-11-10}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
+\chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
+
+In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+
+\section{Website articles}
+
+Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, which is fine for whole websites but not if you want to cite one page or article within a website.
+
+\tip{If the piece is unsigned, put the site name in the \code{author} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{bbc2013cgh}
+BBC News, \enquote{Colchester General Hospital: Police Probe Cancer Treatment} (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{bbc2013cgh,
+  author = {{BBC News}},
+  title = {Colchester General Hospital},
+  subtitle = {Police Probe Cancer Treatment},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If the piece is signed, put the site name in the \code{organization} field.
+  The rationale is that \textsf{biblatex} uses this for the organization hosting the site,
+  and it can get a bit blurry between that and the name of the site itself.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{hooper2013lfs}
+Richard Hooper, \enquote{Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme}, BBC News Magazine (14 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423}, accessed 14 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{hooper2013lfs,
+  author = {Richard Hooper},
+  title = {Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme},
+  organization = {BBC News Magazine},
+  date = {2013-11-14},
+  url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423},
+  urldate = {2013-11-14}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{tan2013wdt}
+Siu-Lan Tan, \enquote{Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?} [including video], OUPblog (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{tan2013wdt,
+  author = {Siu-Lan Tan},
+  title = {Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?},
+  titleaddon = {including video},
+  organization = {OUPblog},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  url = {http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{allaby2013fll}
+Michael Allaby, \enquote{Feathers and Lava Lamps}, Oxford Reference (2013), \url{http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{allaby2013fll,
+  author = {Michael Allaby},
+  title = {Feathers and Lava Lamps},
+  organization = {Oxford Reference},
+  date = {2013},
+  url = {http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If the site looks more like a traditional journal (e.g.\@ with an ISSN), use the \code{article} entry type instead of \code{online}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{mcewen2013tte}
+Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}}, \emph{The Spectator} (20 May 2013), \url{http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@article{mcewen2013tte,
+  author = {Stephen McEwen},
+  title = {Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}},
+  journaltitle = {The Spectator},
+  date = {2013-05-20},
+  options = {varissuedate=false},
+  url = {http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Online reference article}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{eb2013gp}
+\enquote{Gunpowder Plot}, \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, \url{http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{eb2013gp,
+  title = {Gunpowder Plot},
+  maintitle = {Encyclopaedia Britannica},
+  url = {http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
+  It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
+  it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
+  it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
+  or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
+
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{wp2013oup}
+\enquote{Oxford University Press}, Wikipedia (last modified 5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{wp2013oup,
+  title = {Oxford University Press},
+  organization = {Wikipedia},
+  date = {2013-11-05},
+  datetype = {modified},
+  url = {http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the (non-standard) \texttt{datetype} field to clarify the event represented by the main date.}
+
+\section{Social media}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{obama2013tvd}
+Barack Obama, \enquote{Tomorrow is Veterans Day} [Facebook post] (10 Nov. 2013), \url{https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{obama2013tvd,
+  entrysubtype = {facebook},
+  author = {Barack Obama},
+  title = {Tomorrow is Veterans Day},
+  date = {2013-11-10},
+  url = {https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/},
+  urldate = {2013-11-13}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{harvey2013tfm}
+John Harvey, \enquote{\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28} [Facebook post] (13 Nov. 2013), \url{https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{harvey2013tfm,
+  entrysubtype = {facebook},
+  author = {John Harvey},
+  title = {\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28},
+  date = {2013-11-13},
+  url = {https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre},
+  urldate = {2013-11-13}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5*>
+{globe2013otd}
+Shakespeare's Globe, \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I} [Twitter post] (5.48~a.m., 1~Nov. 2013), \url{https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{globe2013otd,
+  entrysubtype = {tweet},
+  author = {{Shakespeare's Globe}},
+  title = {On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I},
+  date = {2013-11-01T05:48:00},
+  options = {timefirst},
+  url = {https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385},
+  urldate = {2013-11-05}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{oup2015tweet}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@online{oup2015tweet,
+  author = {{Oxford University Press}},
+  shortauthor = {OUP},
+  descriptor = {Twitter post},
+  date = {2015-11-16T01:07:00},
+  url = {https://twitter.com/OxUniPress/status/666180787251843072},
+  urldate = {2015-12-25}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Software}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{simoga1.1d6}
+Simoga, \emph{Device 6} (version 1.1) [mobile application for iPhone and iPad], downloaded 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@software{simoga1.1d6,
+  author = {Simoga},
+  title = {Device 6},
+  version = {1.1},
+  titleaddon = {mobile application for iPhone and iPad},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{eliot1.1.1twl}
+T. S. Eliot, \emph{The Waste Land} (version 1.1.1) [mobile application for iPad] (London: Touch Press, 2013), downloaded 9 Nov. 2013.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@software{eliot1.1.1twl,
+  author = {T. S. Eliot},
+  title = {The Waste Land},
+  version = {1.1.1},
+  titleaddon = {mobile application for iPad},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Touch Press},
+  date = {2013},
+  urldate = {2013-11-09}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Database}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.8.5>
+{un2011wpp}
+United Nations, \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-ROM] (New York: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division, 2011).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@dataset{un2011wpp,
+  author = {{United Nations}},
+  title = {World Population Prospects},
+  subtitle = {The 2010 Revision},
+  titleaddon = {CD-ROM},
+  location = {New York},
+  publisher = {{United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division}},
+  date = {2011}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\chapter{Legal references}\label{sec:legal}
+\chapterprecis{commentary, jurisdiction, legal, legislation}
+
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text.
+For a more thorough and robust treatment, intended for a specialist readership, I recommend you use the \href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/oscola}{\textsf{oscola}} style instead.
+
+Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes.
+
+
+\section{Cases}
+
+\subsection{Reported cases}
+
+Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
+
+\tip{Use the \code{keyword} field to specify the jurisdiction. The following are recognized:
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item\val{gb}
+    United Kingdom
+  \item\val{en}:
+    England (default)
+  \item\val{cy}:
+    Wales
+  \item\val{sc}:
+    Scotland
+  \item\val{ni}:
+    Northern Ireland
+  \item\val{eu}:
+    European Union (including the EEC, EC, ECSC and EURATOM)
+  \item\val{echr}:
+    Organs of the Council of Europe dealing with the European Convention on Human Rights
+  \item\val{int}:
+    (Public) international law cases and materials
+  \item\val{us}:
+    United States of America
+  \item\val{ca}:
+    Canada
+  \item\val{aus}:
+    Australia
+  \item\val{nz}:
+    New Zealand
+  \end{itemize}
+}
+
+\tip{Scottish cases heard at the House of Lords or the Supreme Court should technically be given the keyword \val{gb}, therefore you can also identify them with the \key{scottish-style} option.}
+
+\tip{Use either the (non-standard) \code{reporter} or \code{journaltitle} field for the (abbreviated) name of the report series. Use the \code{series} field for a numeric sub-series.}
+
+\tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
+  \val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
+  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+  There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
+}
+
+\tip{If you want to include a parallel citation, you can use the non-standard \code{pardate}, \code{parreporter}, \code{parseries}, \code{parvolume}, and \code{parpages} fields.}
+
+\tip{If you need to, use either the (non-standard) \code{court} or \code{institution} field for the court that decided the case.}
+
+\tip{Use the \code{location} field for the location of the court in American, Australian or Canadian cases.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[78-79]{ridge1964}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{ridge1964}
+\emph{Ridge v Baldwin} [1964] AC 40
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{ridge1964,
+  title = {Ridge v. Baldwin},
+  keywords = {gb},
+  date = {1964},
+  journaltitle = {A.C.},
+  pages = {40}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the \key{year-essential} Boolean entry option to specify whether the year is essential for locating the report, in cases where automatic detection (based on the presence or otherwise of a volume number) fails.
+  There is a similar \key{paryear-essential} option for the parallel year.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{lambert2001}
+\emph{R v Lambert} [2001] 2 WLR 211 (QBD)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{lambert2001,
+  title = {R v Lambert},
+  keywords = {gb},
+  date = {2001},
+  volume = {2},
+  journaltitle = {WLR},
+  pages = {211},
+  institution = {QBD},
+  options = {year-essential=true}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{badische1897}
+\emph{Badische v Soda-Fabrics} (1897) 14 RPC 919 (HL)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{badische1897,
+  title = {Badische v. Soda-Fabrics},
+  date = {1897},
+  journaltitle = {RPC},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {919},
+  institution = {HL}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Use the (non-standard) \code{neutralcite} or \code{number} field for the neutral citation or case number.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{rvg2004}
+\emph{R v G} [2003] UKHL 50, [2004] 1 AC 1034
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{rvg2004,
+  title = {R. v. G.},
+  number = {[2003] UKHL 50},
+  date = {2004},
+  journaltitle = {A.C.},
+  volume = {1},
+  pages = {1034},
+  options = {year-essential},
+  pagination = {[]}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[13]{rvg2004}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.3>
+{smith2001}
+\emph{Smith v Jones} [2001] (1948) 2 All ER 431
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{smith2001,
+  title = {Smith v Jones},
+  date = {2001},
+  origdate = {1948},
+  journaltitle = {All ER},
+  volume = {2},
+  pages = {431},
+  options = {year-essential}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}.
+
+\tip{To print the court of decision plain, you can use the \key{court-plain} option. You can set this globally at the style level or on a per-entry basis.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.3>
+{bowman1978}
+\emph{Bowman v Fussy} [1978] RPC 545, HL
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{bowman1978,
+  title = {Bowman v Fussy},
+  keywords = {gb},
+  date = {1978},
+  journaltitle = {RPC},
+  pages = {545},
+  institution = {HL},
+  options = {court-plain}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{hughes1907}
+\emph{Hughes v Stewart}, 1907 SC 791
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{hughes1907,
+  title = {Hughes v. Stewart},
+  date = {1907},
+  reporter = {SC},
+  pages = {791},
+  keywords = {sc}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{corcoran1932}
+\emph{Corcoran v HM Advocate}, 1932 JC 42
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{corcoran1932,
+  title = {Corcoran v. H.M. Advocate},
+  date = {1932},
+  reporter = {JC},
+  pages = {42},
+  keywords = {sc}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.1>
+{michael1976}
+\emph{Michael v Johnson}, 426 US 346 (1976)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{michael1976,
+  title = {Michael v. Johnson},
+  volume = {426},
+  reporter = {U.S.},
+  pages = {346},
+  date = {1976},
+  keywords = {us}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Unreported cases}
+
+\tip{For cases reported in newspapers, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{newspaper}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.2*>
+{powick1993}
+\emph{Powick v Malvern Wells Water Co}, The Times, 28 Sept.\@ 1993
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{powick1993,
+  entrysubtype = {newspaper},
+  title = {Powick v. Malvern Wells Water Co},
+  date = {1993-09-28},
+  journaltitle = {The Times}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.2*>
+{marianishi1965}
+\emph{R v Marianishi, ex p London Borough of Camden} (CA, 13 Apr.\@ 1965)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{marianishi1965,
+  title = {R v Marianishi, ex p London Borough of Camden},
+  date = {1965-04-13},
+  institution = {C.A.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{European cases}
+
+\tip{You can record the European Case Law Identifier for a case using the \code{ecli} field.
+  The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
+
+\tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
+  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S13.4.4>
+{C118/07}
+Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] ECR I–10889
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{C118/07,
+  keywords = {eu},
+  title = {Commission of the European Communities v. Finland},
+  sorttitle = {Case C0118/0007},
+  number = {C\textendash 118/07},
+  journaltitle = {ECR},
+  volume = {I},
+  pages = {10889},
+  date = {2002}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+
+\tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S13.2.6>
+{alcatel}
+\emph{Alcatel/Telettra} (Case IV/M042) [1991] OJ L122/48, [1991] 4 CLMR 391
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{alcatel,
+  keywords = {eu},
+  title = {Alcatel/Telettra},
+  parvolume = {Case IV/M042},
+  institution = {commission},
+  date = {1991},
+  journaltitle = {OJ},
+  series = {L},
+  volume = {122},
+  pages = {48},
+  note = {[1991] 4 CLMR 391}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{For ECHR cases, put the application number in the \code{number} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.5>
+{young1982}
+\emph{Young, James and Webster v UK} (App no 7601/76) (1982) 4 EHRR 38
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{young1982,
+  title = {Young, James and Webster v. UK},
+  number = {7601/76},
+  reporter = {EHRR},
+  volume = {4},
+  date = {1982},
+  pages = {38},
+  keywords = {echr}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Special formatting is triggered if you specify \code{Series A} or \code{ECHR} as the \code{journaltitle} or \code{reporter}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.5>
+{plattform1988}
+\emph{Plattform \enquote{Artze für das Leben} v Austria} (App no 10126/82) (1988) Series A no 139
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{plattform1988,
+  title = {Plattform \enquote{Artze für das Leben} v. Austria},
+  number = {10126/82},
+  reporter = {Series A},
+  date = {1988},
+  pages = {139},
+  keywords = {echr}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.4.5>
+{osman1998}
+\emph{Osman v UK} (App no 23452/94) ECHR 1998–VIII 3124
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@jurisdiction{osman1998,
+  title = {Osman v UK},
+  number = {23452/94},
+  reporter = {ECHR},
+  date = {1998},
+  volume = {8},
+  pages = {3124},
+  institution = {ECtHR},
+  keywords = {echr}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Legislation}
+
+Use the \code{legislation} entry type for citing Acts, Bills, Orders, Measures, and the like.
+
+\subsection{UK legislation}
+
+\tip{Specify an \code{entrysubtype} of \code{primary} for primary legislation.
+  This ensures only the title and year are printed.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S13.2.3>
+{fwa1891}
+Factory and Workshop Act 1891
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{fwa1891,
+  entrysubtype = {primary},
+  title = {Factory and Workshop Act},
+  shorttitle = {FWA 91},
+  date = {1891},
+  pagination = {section},
+  keywords = {en},
+  number = {54 \& 55 Vict, c. 75}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Specify an \code{entrysubtype} of \code{secondary} for secondary legislation.
+  The number is then printed as well.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.1>
+{lap1897}
+Local Authority Precepts Order 1897, SR~\&~O 1897/201
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{lap1897,
+  entrysubtype = {secondary},
+  title = {Local Authority Precepts Order},
+  date = {1897},
+  number = {SR~\&~O 1897\slash 201},
+  pagination = {rule}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.1>
+{ccsga1987}
+Community Charge Support Grant (Abolition) Order 1987, SI 1987/466
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{ccsga1987,
+  entrysubtype = {secondary},
+  title = {Community Charge Support Grant (Abolition) Order},
+  date = {1987},
+  number = {SI 1987\slash 466},
+  pagination = {regulation}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{European legislation}
+
+As with European cases, European legislation should be given the \val{eu} keyword.
+This is currently the only keyword that makes a difference to the formatting.
+
+According to both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules},
+you can provide an even sparser reference for primary European legislation.
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[\pno~3b]{ECT:Rome}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ECT:Rome}%
+EC Treaty
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{ECT:Rome,
+  entrysubtype = {eu-treaty},
+  title = {EC Treaty},
+  pagination = {article},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+If this seems scandalously short, you may prefer to provide a full reference (including the relevant entry in the OJ or OJ Spec Ed) for the bibliography and use, say, \cs{citetitle} for citations.
+
+Secondary legislation should always have a full reference.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.2>
+{EC:97/1}
+Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice [1997] OJ L234/3
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{EC:97/1,
+  title = {Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice},
+  date = {1997},
+  journaltitle = {OJ},
+  series = {L},
+  issue = {234},
+  pages = {3},
+  pagination = {article},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.2>
+{EEC:1017/68}
+Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport [1968] OJ Spec Ed 302
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{EEC:1017/68,
+  title = {Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport},
+  date = {1968},
+  journaltitle = {OJ Spec Ed},
+  pages = {302},
+  pagination = {article},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.5.2>
+{ECN:1986}
+Commission Notice on agreements of minor importance [1986] OJ C231/2, as amended [1994] OJ C368/20
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legislation{ECN:1986,
+  title = {Commission Notice on agreements of minor importance},
+  date = {1986},
+  journaltitle = {OJ},
+  series = {C},
+  issue = {231},
+  pages = {2},
+  note = {as amended [1994] OJ C368/20},
+  keywords = {eu}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Treaties}
+
+Treaties use the \code{legal} entry type, with \code{piltreaty} as the \code{entrysubtype}.
+
+\tip{Don't use the \code{date} field for treaties; instead, use the \code{execution} field to give a list of dates. Each date should be given in the form \meta{type}=\meta{year-month-day}, where \meta{type} is one of \key{opened}, \key{signed}, \key{adopted}, or \key{inforce}. The dates won't be sorted; they will be printed in the order given.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.6*>
+{refugees}
+Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees (adopted 28 July 1951, entered into force 22 Apr.\@ 1954) 189 UNTS 137
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legal{refugees,
+  entrysubtype = {piltreaty},
+  title = {Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees},
+  execution = {adopted=1951-07-28 and inforce=1954-04-22},
+  pagination = {article},
+  volume = {189},
+  journaltitle = {UNTS},
+  pages = {137}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\section{Hansard}
+
+References to Hansard use the \code{legal} entry type, with \code{parliamentary} as the \code{entrysubtype}.
+
+\tip{For debates since 1909, give \code{Hansard} as the \code{title} and put either \code{HC} or \code{HL} in the \code{type} field.}
+
+\tip{Put the column numbers in the \code{pages} field, and put \code{column} in the \code{bookpagination} field.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.7.3*>
+{hc357}
+Hansard, HC vol.\@ 357, cols.\@ 234–45 (13 Apr.\@ 1965)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legal{hc357,
+  entrysubtype = {parliamentary},
+  title = {Hansard},
+  type = {HC},
+  volume = {357},
+  pages = {234-245},
+  date = {1965-04-13},
+  bookpagination = {column}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\tip{For debates before 1909, give \code{Parl. Deb.} as the \code{title}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.7.3*>
+{pd4/24}
+Parl.\@ Deb.\@ (series 4) vol.\@ 24, col.\@ 234 (24 Mar.\@ 1895)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@legal{pd4/24,
+  entrysubtype = {parliamentary},
+  title = {Parl. Deb.},
+  series = {4},
+  volume = {24},
+  pages = {234},
+  date = {1895-03-24},
+  bookpagination = {column}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Legal reports}
+
+Reports of Parliamentary select committees and the Law Commission should be entered using the \code{report} entry type, with the \code{entrysubtype} set to \code{legal}.
+
+\tip{To print the identifying codes within the publication block, put them all in \code{number}; do not specify a \code{type} or \code{series}.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S13.7.2>
+{lc2009icl}
+Law Commission, \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526, 2009) para 1.15
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@report{lc2009icl,
+  entrysubtype = {legal},
+  author = {{Law Commission}},
+  title = {Intoxication and Criminal Liability},
+  number = {Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526},
+  date = {2009},
+  pages = {1.15},
+  bookpagination = {paragraph}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Commentaries}
+
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries;
+it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
+
+\chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+
+\section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
+
+\subsection{Short poems}
+
+\tip{Use the \code{incollection} entry type for a poem in a collection.
+  If it appears in an article or a work that is itself in a collection,
+  use the \code{misc} entry type for the poem, with a relation of type \code{in} pointing to the containing work.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.8>
+{auden1990era}
+W. H. Auden, \enquote{Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände} [\emph{sic}], in \enquote{The German Auden: Six Early Poems}, trans. David Constantine, in Katherine Bucknell and Nicholas Jenkins (eds.), \emph{W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}: Early Works, Friends, and Influences} (Auden Studies, 1; Oxford, 1990), 1--15 at 6.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@misc{auden1990era,
+  author = {W. H. Auden},
+  title = {Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände},
+  titleaddon = {\emph{sic}},
+  related = {constantine1990gas},
+  relatedtype = {in},
+  pages = {6}}
+@incollection{constantine1990gas,
+  title = {The {German} {Auden}},
+  subtitle = {Six Early Poems},
+  author = {David Constantine},
+  authortype = {translator},
+  options = {useauthor=false},
+  editor = {Katherine Bucknell and Nicholas Jenkins},
+  booktitle = {W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}},
+  booksubtitle = {Early Works, Friends, and Influences},
+  series = {Auden Studies},
+  number = {1},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  date = {1990},
+  pages = {1-15}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.8>
+{blois1993qff}
+William of Blois, \enquote{The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly} (\emph{Pulicis et musce iurgia}), trans. in Jan M. Ziolkowski, \emph{Talking Animals: Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150} (Middle Ages Series, ed. Edward Peters; Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1993), 274--8.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@misc{blois1993qff,
+  author = {{William of Blois}},
+  title = {The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly},
+  origtitle = {Pulicis et musce iurgia},
+  related = {ziolkowski1993tam},
+  relatedtype = {in},
+  relatedstring = {trans.\@ in},
+  pages = {274-278}}
+@book{ziolkowski1993tam,
+  author = {Jan M. Ziolkowski},
+  title = {Talking Animals},
+  subtitle = {Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150},
+  series = {Middle Ages Series},
+  serieseditor = {Edward Peters},
+  location = {Philadelphia},
+  publisher = {University of Pennsylvania Press},
+  date = {1993}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\subsection{Long poems}
+
+If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted.
+
+\tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the poem is published on its own,
+  and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{poem} if the poem is published in an anthology.}
+
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+  \code{book}, \code{canto}, and \code{stanza} (\code{line} is already defined),
+  though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\textcite[\pno~ii, canto vi, stanza iii]{spenser1965fq}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.8*>
+{spenser1965fq}%
+Edmund Spenser, \emph{The Faerie Queene} (Everyman's Library, 443–4; London: Dent, 1965–6) (originally pub. 1590–6).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@book{spenser1965fq,
+  author = {Edmund Spenser},
+  title = {The Faerie Queene},
+  shorttitle = {Faerie Queene},
+  series = {Everyman's Library},
+  number = {443–4},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Dent},
+  date = {1965/1966},
+  origdate = {1590/1596},
+  pagination = {book}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Plays}\label{sec:play}
+
+Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
+
+\tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the play is published on its own,
+  and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{play} if the play is published in an anthology.}
+
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+  \code{act} and \code{scene} (\code{line} is already defined),
+  though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
+
+\section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
+
+\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+
+With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
+
+\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will handle all this for you.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{author} and \code{date} as normal. Note that the \code{date} will not be printed if both the \code{author} and \code{title}\slash \code{descriptor} fields are left blank.}
+
+\tip{Put the library or archive where the manuscript is kept in the \code{library} field, and the city or place name in the \code{location} field. Note that the \code{library} field is required to switch on the special support for manuscripts.}
+
+\tip{Put the collection name in the \code{series} field and the shelfmark in the \code{number} field.}
+
+\tip{Put the page range studied (or some other subdivision) in the \code{pages} field. You can use \cs{recto} and \cs{verso} for the respective sides of a folio, and you can also specify a \code{pagetotal}.}
+
+\tip{You can use the \code{folio} key in the \code{pagination} and \code{bookpagination} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.3*>
+{smithMS23116}
+Francis Smith, travel diaries, 1912–7, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@unpublished{smithMS23116,
+  author = {Francis Smith},
+  descriptor = {travel diaries},
+  date = {1912/1917},
+  library = {British Library},
+  series = {Add. MS},
+  number = {23116}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model.
+
+\tip{You can use \code{author}, \code{title}\slash \code{note}\slash \code{descriptor} and \code{date} as described above. (This is a departure from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.)}
+
+\tip{Put the library or archive where the manuscript is kept in the \code{library} field, and the city or place name in the \code{location} field}
+
+\tip{Put the collection name in the \code{collection} field and the shelfmark in the \code{shelfmark} field.}
+
+\tip{If the date is vague (e.g. a century), you can put this in the \code{dating} field. Note that it will only be printed if the \code{date} is missing\slash not printed.}
+
+\tip{Put the page range studied (or some other subdivision) in the \code{pages} field. You can use \cs{recto} and \cs{verso} for the respective sides of a folio, and you can also specify a \code{pagetotal}.}
+
+\tip{You can specify the number of columns (either \code{1} or \code{2}) in the \code{columns} field.}
+
+\tip{You can specify the layer of a palimpsest in the \code{layer} field. Use \code{inf} for the inferior layer and \code{sup} for the superior layer.}
+
+\tip{You can specify the writing support material in the \code{support} field. Three special keys – \code{papyrus}, \code{paper}, and \code{pergament} – are recognized and (potentially) translated, but other values will be printed as-is.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.2>
+{chaundlerMS288}
+Thomas Chaundler, \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{chaundlerMS288,
+  author = {Thomas Chaundler},
+  title = {Collocutiones},
+  library = {Balliol College},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  shelfmark = {MS288}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.2>
+{exchequerE311}
+exchequer accounts, Dec. 1798, Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{exchequerE311,
+  descriptor = {exchequer accounts},
+  date = {1798-12},
+  library = {Cheshire Record Office},
+  shelfmark = {E311}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.3>
+{blcBOX19d}
+Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes, 12 June 1949, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{blcBOX19d,
+  title = {Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {1949-06-12},
+  library = {Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries},
+  shelfmark = {box 19/d}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR 18.6.5>
+{bodMSrawl-d520}
+Bodleian Library, Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{bodMSrawl-d520,
+  library = {Bodleian Library},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  collection = {MS Rawlinson D.},
+  shelfmark = {520},
+  pages = {7},
+  bookpagination = {folio}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{cantabAGM4429}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@manuscript{cantabAGM4429,
+  library = {University Library},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  collection = {Add. Greek MS},
+  shelfmark = {4489},
+  support = {pergament},
+  dating = {8th--9th c.},
+  pagetotal = {16},
+  columns = {1},
+  pages = {11\recto-11\verso},
+  layer = {inf},
+  bookpagination = {folio}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
+\end{document}
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball
+%%
+%% End of file `oxnum-doc.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
index 1a6ef2b3073..a76916475a9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
@@ -99,6 +99,12 @@
   location = {Hannover},
   publisher = {Hahnsche Buchhandlung},
   date = {1890/1892}}
+@mvbook{wood1861el,
+  author = {title=Mrs, given=Henry, family=Wood},
+  title = {East Lynne},
+  volumes = {3},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1861}}
 @book{tschichold1955tg,
   author = {J. Tschichold},
   title = {Typographische Gestaltung},
@@ -1208,6 +1214,7 @@
   title = {Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}},
   journaltitle = {The Spectator},
   date = {2013-05-20},
+  options = {varissuedate=false},
   url = {http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/},
   urldate = {2013-11-09}}
 @online{eb2013gp,
@@ -1219,7 +1226,7 @@
   title = {Oxford University Press},
   organization = {Wikipedia},
   date = {2013-11-05},
-  datetype = {last modified},
+  datetype = {modified},
   url = {http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 @online{obama2013tvd,
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
index fd8ab0eba17..55d1efa1204 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
index 68ba7d9c4d7..d051c88e674 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
index abb6fe0c6a8..33706d6a5d2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2017/05/14 v0.10}
+\def\Version{2017/11/18 v0.11}
 \ProvidesFile{oxyear-doc.tex}
     [\Version\space Author-year biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxyear,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -139,7 +139,11 @@
 \usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
 \crefname{page}{page}{pages}
 
-\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1}{\textsf{#1}}}
+\NewDocumentCommand{\pkg}{om}{%
+  \IfNoValueTF{#1}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}
+    {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1-#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}%
+}
 \newcommand*{\lit}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
 \newcommand*{\code}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
 \newcommand*{\aside}[1]{\textcolor{violet}{[\textsc{tip:} #1]}}
@@ -304,7 +308,7 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
     separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
   \item\docValue{colon}
     separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
-    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes} and not recommended for this style.
+    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
   \item\docValue{comma}
     separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
   \item\docValue{parens}
@@ -314,8 +318,8 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 
 \begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
   Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
-  The standard option values are available but not well tested; I recommend you stick with the default of \val{year}.
-  If you do select \val{maximum} or \val{compact}, I recommend you also select \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{comp} to avoid loss of information.
+  The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
+  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
 \end{docKey}
 
 \begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
@@ -342,8 +346,8 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 \end{docKey}
 
 \begin{docKey}{usenametitles}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{true}}
-  Controls whether personal titles such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed.
-  (There is an example of how to supply titles in the \hyperref[ex:lewis1981lww]{Lewis reference} on \cpageref{ex:lewis1981lww}.)
+  Controls whether titular prefixes such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed.
+  (See \cref{sec:nametitles} for how to supply titles as part of a name.)
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
@@ -352,7 +356,7 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
-\textsf{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
 It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
 In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
 
@@ -416,7 +420,7 @@ Where a source is provided, it refers to a section from one of the reference wor
 \end{description}
 
 Where the source is starred (*), this indicates the example is not quite how it appears in the book,
-usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \textsf{oxref} default.
+usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} default.
 Where the source is marked with a dagger (\textdagger),
 this indicates that the example has been coverted from an \textsf{oxnotes}-style one,
 since the guides provide relatively few for author-year references.
@@ -428,7 +432,7 @@ amount not so much to a consistent style as a body of advice for creating one.
 Unlike the style manuals published by the American Psychological Association,
 the Modern Language Association, and the University of Chicago to name but three,
 the emphasis of the Oxford guide is to describe good practice rather than prescribe a particular style.
-This means that when it comes to \textsf{oxref}, there are decisions to be made
+This means that when it comes to \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, there are decisions to be made
 as to which variations to support by default, which to support as options,
 and which to ignore quietly.
 
@@ -441,13 +445,14 @@ and have more of an eye on machine processing of bibliographies.
 They do, however, introduce additional variations with less of a steer on what is preferred,
 and are considerably shorter with fewer examples.
 
-The approach of \textsf{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible,
+The approach of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible,
 but where variations are given without strong preference, or where guidance is lacking,
 to follow the preferences of the 2002 guide.
 Where the practices of the humanities and the sciences are contrasted,
-the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes} and the latter for \textsf{oxyear}.
+the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum}
+and the latter for \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear}.
 Where neither version gives explicit guidance on citing a resource supported by \textsf{biblatex},
-\textsf{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex}
+\pkg[biblatex]{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex}
 and other major referencing styles.
 
 Where it is practical to do so,
@@ -461,7 +466,7 @@ see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
 
 \section{To do}
 
-The \textsf{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
+The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
 As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
 interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
 styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
@@ -489,9 +494,6 @@ I would be most glad to hear from you:
   \end{itemize}
 \end{multicols}
 
-It is not possible at the moment to use numeric or alphabetic citation styles
-with \textsf{oxref}, but that might change in the future.
-
 You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
 \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
 as well.
@@ -499,7 +501,7 @@ as well.
 \chapter{Citations and common formatting}\label{sec:citing}
 
 The \textsf{oxyear} bibliography style is intended for use with an author–year citation style,
-and indeed loads a tweaked version of a generic \textsf{biblatex} one.
+and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one.
 
 \section{Test citations}
 
@@ -539,7 +541,7 @@ If a short author label is provided, it is used in place of the full author.
 \subsection{Missing attribution}
 The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have ‘Anonymous’ in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using ‘Anon.\@’ or a short title.
 
-\tip{\textsf{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
 }
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -574,8 +576,9 @@ Anon.\@ (1956), \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\begin{egcite}{(Anon.\@ 1822; 1956)}
-\parencite{anon1822san,anon1956lu}
+\begin{egcite}{(Anon.\@ 1822; 1956), Anon.\@ (1956)}
+\parencite{anon1822san,anon1956lu},
+\textcite{anon1956lu}
 \end{egcite}
 
 
@@ -583,7 +586,7 @@ Anon.\@ (1956), \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée).
 Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
 to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
 
-\tip{With \textsf{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
 }
 
 \begin{egcite}{}
@@ -594,6 +597,7 @@ to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
 <OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger>
 {boethius1976dds}
 Boethius (Ps.-) (1976), \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. O.\ Weijers (Leiden).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @book{boethius1976dds,
@@ -612,7 +616,7 @@ Boethius (Ps.-) (1976), \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introd
 If the attribution is missing from the work but may be inferred from other sources,
 Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 
-\tip{With \textsf{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field
   (usually \code{author} or \code{editor}) with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   You can also annotate names individually within the list, if only some of them should be taken as inferred.}
 
@@ -634,7 +638,7 @@ Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
   If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
-  Note, however, that \textsf{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
 
 \subsection{Pseudonyms}
 
@@ -703,7 +707,8 @@ In cases where an author changes the name under which they publish (e.g.\ due to
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.17.4\textdagger>
 {joukovsky1967gdd}
-\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}Joukovsky, F. (= Joukovsky-Micha, F.) (1967), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29: 55–92.
+Joukovsky, F. (= Joukovsky-Micha, F.) (1967), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29: 55–92.
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @article{joukovsky1967gdd,
@@ -731,6 +736,7 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi
 \begin{bibexbox}
 {kuehner.blass1890ef}
 Kühner, R., rev. Blass, F. (1890-2), \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung).
+\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @mvbook{kuehner.blass1890ef,
@@ -748,7 +754,31 @@ Kühner, R., rev. Blass, F. (1890-2), \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griech
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \textsf{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+
+\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
+
+Generally speaking, using titular prefixes like Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on as part of an author's name is unnecessary,
+but there are occasions when removing them can cause problems, so with \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} you can supply them if you need to.
+I have not added special rules for recognizing such titles, so if you want to include one you have to label each part of the name explicitly, as in the following example (the keyword for the titular prefix is \code{title}).
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<NHR \S18.2.2*\textdagger>
+{wood1861el}
+Wood, Mrs H. (1861), \emph{East Lynne}, 3 vols. (London).
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@mvbook{wood1861el,
+  author = {title=Mrs, given=Henry, family=Wood},
+  title = {East Lynne},
+  volumes = {3},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {1861}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+You can switch the display of titular prefixes on or off using the \key{usenametitles} option.
+This can be set globally or on a per-type or per-entry basis.
 
 \section{Works in foreign languages}
 
@@ -866,9 +896,9 @@ Milne, A. A. (1938), \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}]
 
 For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
 
-\tip{To have \textsf{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
 
-\tip{To have \textsf{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
   This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -982,7 +1012,7 @@ Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Cop
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \textsf{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.}
+\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.}
 
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -1290,7 +1320,8 @@ Biblatex defines \code{book} as a monograph, written either by a single author,
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.5>
 {lyons1981lli}
-Lyons, J. (1981\emph{a}), \emph{Language and Linguistics: An Introduction} (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press).
+Lyons, J. (1981\emph{a}),
+\emph{Language and Linguistics: An Introduction} (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press).
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @book{lyons1981lli,
@@ -1305,7 +1336,8 @@ Lyons, J. (1981\emph{a}), \emph{Language and Linguistics: An Introduction} (Camb
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.5>
 {lyons1981lmc}
-Lyons, J. (1981\emph{b}), \emph{Language, Meaning and Context} (London: Fontana Paperbacks).
+Lyons, J. (1981\emph{b}),
+\emph{Language, Meaning and Context} (London: Fontana Paperbacks).
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @book{lyons1981lmc,
@@ -1395,7 +1427,7 @@ Hankinson, R. J. (1988) (ed.), \emph{Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics} (Edmonto
 
 Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
 
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \textsf{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1433,7 +1465,8 @@ Where all volumes were published consistently, the following form is used:
 \spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher), VolNo. Pages.}
 
 \begin{egcite}{}
-\parencite[ii.~\mkcomprange{367-368}]{straeten1867lmp}
+\parencite[ii.~\mkcomprange{367-368}]%
+{straeten1867lmp}
 \end{egcite}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -1552,7 +1585,7 @@ Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title,
 and there are many volumes spanning years and possibly publishers,
 the following form is used:
 
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{VolTitle}, (\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title) (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{VolTitle}, [\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title] (Location: Publisher), Pages.}
 
 \tip{To get this format, use \code{book} instead of \code{mvbook}.}
 
@@ -1843,7 +1876,7 @@ Hare, C. (1949), \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London); repr. as \emph{The Wind Bl
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 \tip{A more generalized version of this relation is available.
-  If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \textsf{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas},
+  If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas},
   the edition and any editorial contributions will be printed in the linking text.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -1957,7 +1990,8 @@ Barnes, J. (1982), \emph{Aristotle} (Past Masters; Oxford).
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
 {smithFCgaf}
-Smith, P. (forthcoming \emph{a}), \emph{Gender and Famine}, 2 vols. (London).
+Smith, P. (forthcoming \emph{a}),
+\emph{Gender and Famine}, 2 vols. (London).
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @mvbook{smithFCgaf,
@@ -2567,13 +2601,13 @@ The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} opt
 \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
 \chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
 
-There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \textsf{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
+There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
 
 \section{Audio recordings}
 
 The basic structure of audio recording entries is as follows:
 
-\spec{Composer (Year), \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].}
+\spec{Composer (RecordingYear), \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].}
 
 If the composer's name is not of interest, it may be omitted or replaced by the artist's name.
 In the absence of examples to the contrary, \textsf{oxyear} uses the year of recording at the head of the reference if available, otherwise it uses the year of publication.
@@ -2598,7 +2632,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording
   a publishing company, comma, location, comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Christophorus-Verlag Herder, Freiburg im Breisgau,}
 \end{itemize}
 
-\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \textsf{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to.
+\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to.
 
 \tip{To get the normal format, put the label name in \code{publisher}, the type of release (e.g.\@ compact disc, audio cassette) in \code{type}, and the catalogue number in \code{number}. In the examples from \emph{New Hart's Rules}, the type is uniformly omitted.}
 
@@ -2925,7 +2959,7 @@ Rubinstein, A. (1956), \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Mod
 
 \section{Broadcasts}\label{sec:broadcasts}
 
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \textsf{Oxref} sides with the latter.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} sides with the latter.
 
 \spec{\emph{Title} (Year), Channel (Location, Day Month, Time).}
 
@@ -2949,7 +2983,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 
 \tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
   If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
-  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \textsf{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -3184,6 +3218,7 @@ McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternati
   title = {Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}},
   journaltitle = {The Spectator},
   date = {2013-05-20},
+  options = {varissuedate=false},
   url = {http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/},
   urldate = {2013-11-09}}
 \end{Verbatim}
@@ -3211,7 +3246,7 @@ McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternati
   it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
   or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
 
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \textsf{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -3223,7 +3258,7 @@ McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternati
   title = {Oxford University Press},
   organization = {Wikipedia},
   date = {2013-11-05},
-  datetype = {last modified},
+  datetype = {modified},
   url = {http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 \end{Verbatim}
@@ -3356,10 +3391,10 @@ United Nations (2011), \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-
 \chapter{Legal references}\label{sec:legal}
 \chapterprecis{commentary, jurisdiction, legal, legislation}
 
-\textsf{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text.
 For a more thorough and robust treatment, intended for a specialist readership, I recommend you use the \href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/oscola}{\textsf{oscola}} style instead.
 
-Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \textsf{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \textsf{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes.
+Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes.
 
 Since legal references are usually cited using footnotes, how \textsf{oxyear} should behave is not well defined. As a result, I have not configured it to do anything fancy: the full reference will be formatted just the same as with \textsf{oxnotes}, and citations will typically be title–year using parentheses in the usual way. I am open to suggestions for how to handle things better.
 
@@ -3513,7 +3548,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \textsf{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}.
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}.
 
 \tip{To print the court of decision plain, you can use the \key{court-plain} option. You can set this globally at the style level or on a per-entry basis.}
 
@@ -3841,7 +3876,7 @@ Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport [196
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \textsf{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.}
+\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S13.5.2>
@@ -3961,7 +3996,7 @@ Law Commission (2009), \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 3
 
 \section{Commentaries}
 
-\textsf{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries;
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries;
 it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
 
 \chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
@@ -4038,7 +4073,7 @@ If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted
 \tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the poem is published on its own,
   and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{poem} if the poem is published in an anthology.}
 
-\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \textsf{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
   \code{book}, \code{canto}, and \code{stanza} (\code{line} is already defined),
   though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
 
@@ -4050,7 +4085,6 @@ If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted
 <OGS \S15.8*\textdagger>
 {spenser1965fq}%
 Spenser, E. (1590–6), \emph{The Faerie Queene} (Everyman's Library, 443–4; London: Dent, 1965–6).
-
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @book{spenser1965fq,
@@ -4074,7 +4108,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
 \tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the play is published on its own,
   and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{play} if the play is published in an anthology.}
 
-\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \textsf{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
+\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types
   \code{act} and \code{scene} (\code{line} is already defined),
   though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
 
@@ -4085,9 +4119,9 @@ but support is provided anyway for the sake of completeness.
 
 \spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
 
-With \textsf{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
+With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
 
-\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\textsf{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \textsf{oxref} will handle all this for you.}
+\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will handle all this for you.}
 
 \tip{Use \code{author} and \code{date} as normal. Note that the \code{date} will not be printed if both the \code{author} and \code{title}\slash \code{descriptor} fields are left blank.}
 
@@ -4116,7 +4150,7 @@ Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.
-\textsf{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model.
+\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model.
 
 \tip{You can use \code{author}, \code{title}\slash \code{note}\slash \code{descriptor} and \code{date} as described above. (This is a departure from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.)}